manualshive.com logo in svg

Toshiba E-STUDIO2008A, Service Manual, Page: 974 / 1016

Share
Download
Toshiba E-STUDIO2008A Service Manual Download Page 974

e-STUDIO2008A/2508A/3008A/3508A/4508A/5008A

© 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING

11 - 14

11.3

Patch Updating with USB Device

System firmware and System software can be updated in a shorter time than normal update using the 
data file for the patch update.

Notes: 

When performing the update, use the latest program.

11.3.1

Firmware type and data file name for patch updating

Equipment

Store the data file for patch updating in the model specific folder.

Fig.11-6

Notes: 

•

Since the date and time set in the equipment are recorded in the firmware update log, make sure 
that they are correct before updating the firmware.

•

Never change the model specific folder name, since it is used for identifying the data file when 
the data files used for updating multiple models are stored in the USB device.

Important: 

•

Only the USB devices which meet the following conditions should be used for updating. Be 
careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.

-

A combination USB device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the 
USB port) and its capacity is 1GB or more.

-

Operation of the USB device used for updating has been confirmed at the input 
check of this equipment (03 Test mode). (

 P. 5-9 "5.4 [03 TEST MODE]")

-

USB devices which comply with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB 
Implementers Forum)
Class number: 

8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)

Sub-class number: 

6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)

Protocol number: 

80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)

Firmware

Stored

Data file name

Display

System firmware

System control 
PC board 
(SYS board)

T410SFPWxxxx.tar
*

xxxx is version.

SYSTEM 
FIRMWARE(OS Data)

System software

HDD

T410HDPWxxxx.tar
*

xxxx is version.

SYSTEM SOFTWARE 
(HD Data)

Model specific folder name

2008A_5008A

USB device

2008A_5008A

T410HDPWxxxx.tar

T410SFPWxxxx.tar

PackageDescriptor.xml
ReleaseNotes.txt

Summary of Contents for E-STUDIO2008A

Page 1: ...E MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A Model DP 2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A Publish Date December 2015 File No SME15001000 R150521Q3200 TTEC VerB_2015 10 ...

Page 2: ...ountries Apple AppleTalk Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Inc in the U S and other countries PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell Inc Mylar is a registered trademark of DuPont Teijin Films U S Limited Partnership Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation FLOIL is a registered tr...

Page 3: ...urce The equipment must be grounded for safety Select a suitable place for installation Avoid excessive heat high humidity dust vibration and direct sunlight Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone To insure adequate working space for the copying operation keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm 32 on the left 80 cm 32 on the right and 10 cm 4 on the rear The equipm...

Page 4: ...ns such as gears belts pulleys fans and laser beam exit of the laser optical unit Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON be sure not to touch live sections and rotating operating sections Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam Use designated jigs and tools Use recommended measuring in...

Page 5: ...for high temperature area fuser unit 6 Disposal of the Equipment Supplies Packing Materials Used Batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment supplies packing materials used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries follow the relevant local regulations or rules Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteri...

Page 6: ...following procedure cannot guarantee the operation of the transported equipment A Fixing the carriage 1 Perform the PM code FS 03 261 Scan motor ON Automatically stops at limit position so that the carriage is moved to the fixing position 2 Tighten the 2 screws to fix the carriage B Attach the packing material scanner supporting member 1 Attach the packing material under the scanner if it is still...

Page 7: ......

Page 8: ...elle verwenden Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen Standorte mit zuviel Hitze hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit Staub Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm links 80 cm rech...

Page 9: ...das Netzgerät berühren Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden da die Kondensatoren usw auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein können Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche z B drehbare oder betriebsrelevante Bereiche wie Zahnräder Riemen Riemenscheiben Lüfter und die Laseraustrittsöffnung der optischen Lasereinheit sicherstel...

Page 10: ...eile zu verwenden die von der Toshiba TEC Corporation empfohlen sind 5 Warnetiketten Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen überprüfen z B Unplug the power cable during service Netzkabel vor Beginn der Wartungsarbeiten abziehen CAUTION HOT VORSICHT HEISS CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE VORSICHT HOCHSPANNUNG CAUTION LASER BEAM VORSICHT LASER usw um sicherzustel...

Page 11: ... einschließlich Lithiumakkus sind die einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen Caution Dispose of used batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual Attention Se débarrasser de batteries et IC RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel Vorsicht Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC RAMs inclusive der Lithium Batterie nac...

Page 12: ...position durch Laserstrahlung kommen Die Lasereinheit ist vollständig mit einer Schutzabdeckung versiegelt Solange ausschließlich die Arbeitsschritte der vorgeschriebenen Anleitungen durchgeführt werden tritt der Laserstrahl nicht aus und es besteht keine Gefahr der Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt zu werden Das folgende Laser Warnetikett ist an der Abdeckung vorne rechts angebracht Warnhinweise Setzen S...

Page 13: ...eaters 3 15 3 3 7 Thermistors and thermostats 3 16 3 3 8 Transformer 3 16 3 3 9 Others 3 16 3 4 COPY PROCESS 3 17 3 4 1 General Description of Copying Process 3 17 3 5 Comparison with e STUDIO257 357 457 507 3 18 3 6 GENERAL OPERATION 3 20 3 6 1 Overview of Operation 3 20 3 6 2 Description of Operation 3 20 3 6 3 Detection of Abnormality 3 23 3 6 4 Hibernation function 3 28 3 7 CONTROL PANEL 3 29 ...

Page 14: ...7 3 16 5 Drive of ADU 3 68 3 17 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3 69 3 17 1 Construction 3 69 3 17 2 Explanation of functions 3 69 3 17 3 Operation of DC Output Circuits 3 70 3 17 4 Output Channel 3 72 3 17 5 Fuse 3 73 4 DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 1 4 1 Covers 4 1 4 1 1 Front cover 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 4 1 4 1 3 Receiving tray 4 2 4 1 4 Tray rear cover 4 2 4 1 5 Left top cover 4 3 4 1 6 Left rear cover 4 3 4...

Page 15: ... 2nd drawer separation roller guide 4 61 4 5 18 1st drawer paper feed roller separation roller and pick up roller 4 63 4 5 19 2nd drawer paper feed roller separation roller and pick up roller 4 65 4 5 20 1st drawer detection switch SW11 4 66 4 5 21 2nd drawer detection switch SW12 4 67 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit 4 68 4 5 23 Lower tray up motor unit 4 68 4 5 24 Upper tray up motor M11 4 69 4 5...

Page 16: ...al 4 113 4 9 Transfer unit 4 114 4 9 1 Transfer unit 4 114 4 9 2 TRU fan M9 4 115 4 9 3 Transfer roller unit 4 116 4 9 4 Transfer roller 4 116 4 9 5 Separation needle 4 118 4 9 6 Ozone filter 4 119 4 10 Fuser Unit 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 4 121 4 10 2 Front side cover 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 4 123 4 10 4 Fuser roller cover 4 123 4 10 5 Paper entrance guide 4 124 4 10 6 Separation finger 4 124 ...

Page 17: ...er 4 167 4 13 2 MR 3031 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder 4 171 4 13 3 KD 1058 Paper Feed Pedestal 4 174 4 13 4 KD 1059 Large Capacity Feeder 4 177 4 13 5 KN 5005 Bridge Kit 4 180 4 13 6 MJ 1042 Inner Finisher 4 182 4 13 7 MJ 1110 Saddle Stitch Finisher 4 185 4 13 8 MJ 1109 Finisher 4 187 4 13 9 MJ 6105 with MJ 1110 Hole punch unit 4 188 4 13 10 MJ 6105 with MJ 1109 Hole punch unit 4 192 4 13 11...

Page 18: ... 6 SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 1 6 1 Adjustment Order 6 1 6 2 Adjustment of Auto Toner Sensor 6 2 6 3 Image Dimensional Adjustment 6 4 6 3 1 General description 6 4 6 3 2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 6 6 6 3 3 Printer related adjustment 6 8 6 3 4 Scanner related adjustment 6 14 6 4 Image Quality Adjustment Copying Function 6 23 6 4 1 Automatic gamma adjustment 6 23 6 4 2 Density adjustment ...

Page 19: ...6 62 6 12 3 Adjustment of skew 6 64 6 12 4 Adjustment of the leading edge position 6 67 6 12 5 Adjustment of horizontal position 6 69 6 12 6 Adjustment of copy ratio 6 70 6 13 Adjustment of the Inner Finisher 6 71 6 13 1 Alignment position adjustment 6 71 6 13 2 Stapling position adjustment 6 71 6 13 3 Punching position center adjustment 6 72 6 13 4 Punch hole position adjustment 6 73 6 14 Adjustm...

Page 20: ...nisher 7 40 7 7 17 Hole punch unit MJ 6105 7 45 7 8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies 7 46 7 8 1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies 7 46 7 8 2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum 7 47 7 8 3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade 7 48 7 8 4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller 7 48 7 8 5 Checking and replacing the transfer roller 7 49 7 9 PM KI...

Page 21: ... 299 8 3 27 Network error 8 309 8 4 Troubleshooting for the Image 8 319 8 4 1 Abnormality of image density Gray balance 8 319 8 4 2 Background fogging 8 320 8 4 3 Moire lack of sharpness 8 321 8 4 4 Toner offset 8 322 8 4 5 Blurred image 8 324 8 4 6 Poor fusing 8 325 8 4 7 Blank copy 8 326 8 4 8 Solid copy 8 327 8 4 9 White banding or white void in the feeding direction 8 328 8 4 10 White banding ...

Page 22: ...er the PC board HDD SSD replacement 9 34 9 2 11 License re registration using the one time dongle 9 35 9 3 Precautions for Installation of GP 1070 and Disposal of HDD Board 9 37 9 3 1 Precautions for Installation of GP 1070 9 37 9 3 2 Precautions when disposing of the HDD 9 37 9 3 3 Precautions when disposing of the SYS board 9 37 9 3 4 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM 9 37 10 REMOTE SERVICE...

Page 23: ... 13 13 EXTERNAL COUNTERS 13 1 13 1 Outline 13 1 13 2 Signal 13 1 13 2 1 Pin Layout 13 1 13 2 2 Details of the signals 13 3 13 3 Notices 13 4 13 3 1 Setting code 13 4 13 3 2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the Card controller 13 4 13 3 3 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin controller 13 4 13 3 4 Setting value change and restrictions when using the key counter ...

Page 24: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved CONTENTS 12 ...

Page 25: ...nosis mode is updated Abolishing the use of the download jig The use of the download jig is abolished Instead a USB device is used for all firmware updates Dual Scan Document Feeder DSDF The DSDF with simultaneous duplex scanning is adopted as an option In addition installation of the DSDF and Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF is improved Envelope specific drawer An envelope specific drawer...

Page 26: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FEATURES 1 2 ...

Page 27: ...Photosensor type OPC Original scanning sensor Linear CCD sensor Scanning light source LED Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi 1200dpi x 1200dpi PS only Gradation 256 Paper feeding 2 drawer Bypass feeding 2 drawer Bypass feeding PFP 1 drawer optional 2 drawer Bypass feeding PFP 2 drawers optional 2 drawer Bypass feeding LCF optional Paper supply Drawer PFP optional Stack...

Page 28: ...per weight 60 g m2 to 256 g m2 17 lb Bond to 80 lb Cover Toner supply Automatic toner density detection supply There is a recovered toner supply mechanism Density control Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Total counter Electronic counter Memory RAM Main memory 2 GB including page memory A 4 GB memory is usable as a replacement optional Page Memory Included in ma...

Page 29: ...0 Hz The acceptable value of each voltage is 10 Power consumption 1 5 kW or less 100 V 115 V 1 6 kW or less 200 V series The electric power is supplied to the RADF Finisher PFP and LCF through the equipment Weight 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm Approx 58 kg 127 87 lb 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Approx 61 kg 134 48 lb Dimensions of the equipment W 585 x D 597 x H 787 mm When the tilt angle of the control panel is 90 degr...

Page 30: ...nt settings Storage capacity Memory is full Original glass Original scanning system Flat surface scanning system the left rear corner used as guide to place originals Original type Sheets books Original size Max A3 LD Reversing Automatic Document Feeder optional Original scanning system Fixed scanning system by feeding the original the center used as guide to place originals Original type Sheets c...

Page 31: ...LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 25 3 25 3 14 25 3 25 3 A4 R B5 R LT R 17 7 17 7 14 17 7 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 15 7 15 7 14 15 7 A3 LD 14 14 14 14 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 30 3 30 3 16 8 30 3 30 3 A4 R B5 R LT R 23 3 23 3 16 8 23 3 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 19 5 19 5 16 8 1...

Page 32: ... 29 5 29 5 25 4 29 5 A3 LD 25 4 25 4 25 4 25 4 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 50 3 50 3 25 4 50 3 50 3 A4 R B5 R LT R 35 35 25 4 35 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 29 5 29 5 25 4 29 5 A3 LD 25 4 25 4 25 4 25 4 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ...

Page 33: ...ypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 35 3 35 3 24 8 35 3 35 3 A4 R B5 R LT R 33 9 33 9 24 8 33 9 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 28 7 28 7 24 8 28 7 A3 LD 24 8 24 8 24 8 24 8 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 43 4 43 4 24 8 43 4 43 4 A4 R B5 R LT R 33 9 33 9 24 8 33 9 B...

Page 34: ...rawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 29 29 16 29 A4 R B5 R LT R 22 5 22 5 16 22 5 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 18 18 16 18 A3 LD 16 16 16 16 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 35 3 35 3 20 35 3 A4 R B5 R LT R 29 29 20 29 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 23 23 20 23 A3 LD 2...

Page 35: ...er supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 25 25 14 25 A4 R B5 R LT R 20 20 14 20 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 16 16 14 16 A3 LD 14 14 14 14 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 28 28 14 28 A4 R B5 R LT R 20 20 14 20 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 16 16 14 ...

Page 36: ... side 1 Total length of wrinkles Less than 100 mm 50 mm or shorter length per 1 wrinkle 2 3 or less wrinkles 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LCF A4 LT only Size specified Size not specified A4 LT B5 A5 R ST R 8 5 SQ 20 20 12 20 A4 R B5 R LT R 16 16 12 16 B4 LG FOLIO COMPUTER 14 14 12 14 A3 LD 12 12 12 12 Paper supply Paper size Drawer Bypass feed PFP LC...

Page 37: ...The finisher saddle stitch finisher and hole punch unit not installed Copy mode Sec 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Single sided originals Single sided copies 1 set 92 89 85 88 83 83 5 sets 97 96 94 96 92 92 10 sets 99 98 97 97 96 96 20 sets 100 99 99 99 98 98 Single sided originals Double sided copies 1 set 83 78 72 72 61 61 5 sets 97 95 93 93 90 90 10 sets 99 98 96 96 94 94 20 sets 100 99 98...

Page 38: ...10 4 or later Solaris v2 6 2 7 7 8 8 9 10 HP UX ver 10 20 11 x HP UX64 ver 11 31 AIX 4 3 3 Red Hat 7 x 8 x 9 x Red Hat Enterprise WS2 SuSE Linux 7 x 8 x 9 x Mandrake Linux 7 x 8 x 9 x and Turbolinux 8 10 SCO UnixWare 7 SCO Open UNIX 8 CUPS Resolution 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200dpi PS only Eliminated portion Leading edges Trailing edges Side edges 4 2 2 0 mm Interface Standard Ethernet 1000BASE T 100...

Page 39: ...cument Size A3 B4 A4 A4 R A5 B5 B5 R A5 R LT LT R LG LD ST ST R Computer Folio Speed 0 7 sec per page A4 Max 50 spm ITU T No 1 A4 8 x 3 85 Text mode Gray scale 256 levels Error Diffusion Address book Address Book 400 stations Group Max 40 stations Transmission Features Broadcast transmission Max 80 destinations job Fax number and E mail address are available to registered in same job Message size ...

Page 40: ... 100 dpi Fine 200 x 200 dpi Super Fine 200 x 400 dpi Ultra Fine 400 x 400 dpi Internet Fax 200 dpi x 200 dpi Original Document Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMPUTER Mail Box User defined Max 300 boxes Routed document format Send to e Filing MMR Send to File SMB Single TIFF Multi TIFF Single PDF Multi PDF Send to FTP Single TIFF Multi TIFF Single PDF Multi PDF Send to E mail Single TIFF Mu...

Page 41: ...ina KRD Korea ARD Argentina JPD Japan Notes Check that the above accessories are correctly co packed at the time of unpacking Unpacking Setup instruction 1 set Operator s manual 1 set Safety Information 1 manual Quick Start Guide 1 manual DVD 1 pc Client Utilities User Documentation DVD Power cable 1 pc Warranty sheet 1 pc for NAD Setup report 1 set for NAD and MJD Rubber plug small 2 pcs Rubber p...

Page 42: ...Desk MH 5005 Accessible Arm KK 2560 Manual Pocket KK 5008 C Ten Key GR 1260 Keyboad Table GR 1250 Staple Cartridge STAPLE 2400 Staple Cartridge STAPLE 2400 Staple Cartridge STAPLE 2400 Staple Cartridge Saddle stitch STAPLE 3100 Envelope Drawer MY 1049 C Work Table KK 5005 C Hole Punch Unit MJ 6011N E F S E C Inner Finisher MJ 1042 C Job Separator MJ 5015 C Job Separator MJ 5014 C Bridge Kit KN 500...

Page 43: ...IDGE ID Gate KP 2005 Card Reader Holder GR 1290 Unicode Font Enabler GS 1007 OCR Enabler 1 licence GS 1080 Multi Station Print Enabler 1 licence GS 1090 Multi Station Print Enabler 5 licence GS 1095 OCR Enabler 5 licence GS 1085 IP Sec Enabler GP 1080 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 USB Hub GR 1270 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 Data overwrite Enabler GP 1070 FAX Unit GD 1370 NA EU C 2nd Line for FA...

Page 44: ...TIONS SUPPLIES 2 18 Notes The bridge kit KN 5005 C is necessary for installation of the finisher MJ 1109 C or MJ 1110 C The finisher MJ 1042 C is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit MJ 6011E N F S E C The finisher MJ 1109 C or MJ 1110 C is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit MJ 6105 E N F S E C ...

Page 45: ...nner Finisher MJ 6011E N F S E C Hole Punch Unit for MJ 1042 MJ 1109 C Finisher MJ 1110 C Saddle Stitch Finisher MJ 6105 E N F S E C Hole Punch Unit for MJ 1109 1110 STAPLE 2400 Staple Cartridge for MJ 1042 1109 1110 STAPLE 3100 Staple Cartridge MJ 1110 saddle stitch GD 1370NA EU C J Fax Unit GR 1250 Keyboad Table GR 1260 Ten Key GR 1270 USB Hub GR 1290 Card Reader Holder GN 4020 C Wireless LAN Bl...

Page 46: ...2 20 2 5 Supplies Drum PS OD 4530 except for China OD 4530C for China Developer material PS ZD5070 except for China D4530C for China Toner cartridge PS ZT3008U 1 for North America Central and South America PS ZT3008E 1 for Europe PS ZT3008C 1 PS ZT3008C 8 PS ZT3008CM 1 PS ZT3008CM 8 for China PS ZT3008P 1 for Asia PS ZT5070T 1 for Taiwan ...

Page 47: ...CHINE 3 1 3 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 1 Sectional View Fig 3 1 A1 A2 A3 A10 A11 A7 A6 A8 A4 A5 A9 H1 H2 H7 H3 I1 I1 I2 I2 G2 G2 E7 E6 I3 I4 D2 D1 C17 C20 C12 C11 C13 C10 C14 C4 C3 C5 C2 C6 C1 J2 E1 E2 E3 F2 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F12 F10 F11 F8 F9 G7 G7 G6 G6 G3 G3 G4 G4 J1 B1 B2 E4 C2 D3 G8 G8 H4 H1 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm ...

Page 48: ...08A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 2 Fig 3 2 I6 I5 H6 J3 H5 H5 F14 C7 C8 D4 E5 C16 C18 C19 C15 F13 J4 A12 A14 A15 A13 I5 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm ...

Page 49: ...ater lamp center side C5 1st drawer tray up sensor G4 Separation finger for heat roller C6 1st drawer empty sensor G5 Fuser center thermostat C7 1st tray up motor G6 Fuser front thermostat C8 1st drawer feed clutch G7 Center side edge thermistor C9 2nd drawer G8 Exit sensor C10 2nd drawer pickup roller H1 Exit roller C11 2nd drawer feed roller H2 Reverse exit roller C12 2nd drawer separation rolle...

Page 50: ...508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 4 3 2 Electric Parts Layout 1 Scanner unit control panel Fig 3 3 M1 EXP S3 S21 S20 S2 S1 CCD TCP KEY DSP THMO4 DH2 ...

Page 51: ...5 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 5 2 Power supply developer unit Fig 3 4 ERS S4 SW3 SW2 THMS4 DH1 SW1 EPU LVPS HVPS M2 THMO3 ...

Page 52: ...08A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 6 3 Laser unit fuser unit toner cartridge Fig 3 5 M3 M4 SW4 THMS3 THMS2 LAMP1 LAMP2 LAMP3 S5 THMO1 THMO2 THMS1 LDR SNS CTRG CTIF ...

Page 53: ...3 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 7 4 Drive unit 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm Fig 3 6 S19 M7 M8 LGC M6 SYS HDD M5 ...

Page 54: ...A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 8 5 Automatic duplexing unit transfer unit exit unit 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm Fig 3 7 S17 CLT1 M10 SW5 S7 S6 M9 S16 ...

Page 55: ...3 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 9 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Fig 3 8 S17 CLT1 M10 M13 SW5 S7 S6 M9 S18 SOL1 S16 ...

Page 56: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 10 6 Bypass feed unit Fig 3 9 CLT2 SFB S8 SW10 ...

Page 57: ...BA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 11 7 Drawer unit Fig 3 10 S13 S10 S15 S9 S14 CLT4 S12 S11 CLT3 CLT5 CLT6 SW6 SW11 SW12 M12 M11 SW８ SW9 SW7 ...

Page 58: ...it fuser unit registration roller transport rollers feed rollers and pickup rollers Fig 3 6 14 21 M9 TRU FAN TRU fan Assisting the paper separation process Fig 3 7 Fig 3 8 13 9 M10 EXIT MOT Exit motor Driving the exit roller Fig 3 7 Fig 3 8 33 18 M11 TRAY U MOT Upper tray up motor Driving the lifting movement of trays in upper drawer Fig 3 10 7 18 M12 TRAY L MOT Lower tray up motor Driving the lif...

Page 59: ...16 18 S16 1ST FEED SNR 1st transport sensor Detecting the transporting paper and jamming fed from the bypass drawer ADU Fig 3 7 Fig 3 8 21 14 S17 RGST SNR Registration sensor Detecting the paper transport at the registration roller section Fig 3 7 Fig 3 8 21 14 S18 REV SNR Reverse sensor Detecting the transporting paper at the reverse section Fig 3 8 34 2 S19 TEMP HUMI SNR Temperature humidity sen...

Page 60: ...OV SW Feed cover opening closing switch Feed cover opening closing detection Fig 3 9 SW11 CST1 SW 1st drawer detection switch Detecting the presence of the 1st drawer Fig 3 10 SW12 CST2 SW 2nd drawer detection switch Detecting the presence of the 2nd drawer Fig 3 10 Symbol Name Function Remarks P I CLT1 RGST CLT Registration roller clutch Driving the registration roller Fig 3 7 Fig 3 8 21 17 CLT2 ...

Page 61: ... PC board LDR board Driving the laser diode Fig 3 5 11 1 LGC PWA F LGC Logic PC board LGC board Controlling the print engine section Fig 3 6 9 13 SFB PWA F SFB Paper size detection board Detecting the width of paper on the bypass tray Fig 3 9 19 13 SNS PWA F SNS H sync signal detection PC board SNS board Detection of the laser beam position Fig 3 5 11 1 SYS PWA F SYS System control PC board SYS bo...

Page 62: ... of the center heater lamp Fig 3 5 31 31 THMS2 THMS S HTR Side thermistor Detecting the surface temperature at the rear side of the fuser roller for controlling the temperature of the side heater lamp Fig 3 5 31 31 THMS3 THMS EDG HTR Edge thermistor Detecting the surface temperature at the edge of the fuser roller for preventing overheating Fig 3 5 31 31 THMS4 THMS DRM Drum thermistor Detecting th...

Page 63: ...ing heat and pressure 4 Data writing The electrical signals are converted into light signal laser emission which exposes the surface of the photoconductive drum 10 Cleaning Scrapes off the residual toner from the drum 5 Development Negatively charged toner adheres to the photoconductive drum and forms visible image 11 Discharging Eliminates the residual negative charge from the surface of the phot...

Page 64: ...arging Grid voltage Scorotron method Needle electrode 547 V Adjustment not required 558 V Adjustment not required 3 Data writing Light source Light amount Semiconductor laser Adjustment not required 4 25nJ mm2 4 75nJ mm2 4 Development Magnetic roller Auto toner Toner supply Toner empty detection Toner Developer material Developer bias One magnetic roller Magnetic bridgecircuit method Toner cartrid...

Page 65: ...thod Recovered toner Cleaning blade Reuse There is the recovered toner supply mechanism 9 Fusing Method Cleaning Heater Long life fuser roller method Fuser roller Thin roller coated with fluoroplastic ø35 Pressure roller PFA tube roller ø30 Heater lamp 600W x 2 Turned ON OFF by thermistor PFA tube roller ø35 600W x 2 300W x 1 600W x 2 600W x 2 300W x 1 Process e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 e ST...

Page 66: ... UP is displayed 2 Pre running operation The pre running operation is started when the temperature of the fuser roller surface reaches a certain temperature The main motor is turned ON Fuser roller rotated Drum rotated Initialization of feeding system Each drawer tray goes up Pre running operation stops after three seconds 3 When the surface temperature of the fuser roller becomes sufficient for f...

Page 67: ...the registration roller The registration sensor is turned ON and aligning is performed Drawer feed clutch OFF after a certain period of time 3 After the carriage operation Registration clutch ON after a certain period of time paper is transported to the transfer area Copy counter operates 4 After the registration clutch is turned ON Transfer charger ON after a certain period of time Copy counter o...

Page 68: ...roller start to rotate Aligning operation Paper reaches the registration roller After a certain period of time the bypass feed clutch OFF 4 Hereafter the operation 3 through 6 of P 3 21 3 Drawer feed copying 1st drawer paper feeding is repeated 5 Interruption copying 1 Press the INTERRUPT button LED INTERRUPT ON Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped Carriages 1 and 2 return to appro...

Page 69: ... key copy counter 2 Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the door switch D Misfeed in equipment E Replace the toner cartridge F EPU not installed properly 3 Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main power switch G Call for service 2 Description of abnormality A Add paper Drawer empty sensor detects the presence or absence of paper When drawer is not installed No drawer detected T...

Page 70: ... absence of paper Cleared by turning the drawer open close Tray up sensor is turned ON in a fixed period of time The tray motor stops At this time if the empty sensor is ON It is judged that there is paper OFF It is judged that there is no paper Drawer area of the LCD panel blinks When the drawer is selected When the paper in the drawer runs out during copying The tray up sensor turned OFF The tra...

Page 71: ...stalls it Set key copy counter displayed Copying operation disabled When the counter is pulled out during copying Copying is stopped when the key copy counter is pulled out Set key copy counter displayed Copying operation disabled Exit sensor detects jamming of the leading edge of paper Registration clutch ON Fig 3 12 Less than regulation time Exit sensor ON If the exit sensor is not turned ON aft...

Page 72: ...ime Reverse sensor ON If the reverse sensor is not turned ON after the regulation time Paper jam E570 The copying operation is stopped Reverse sensor detects jamming of the tailing edge of paper 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Exit sensor OFF Less than regulation time Reverse sensor OFF If the reverse sensor is not turned OFF after the regulation time Paper jam E580 The copying operation is stopped Immediately ...

Page 73: ...jam E110 During paper transporting from ADU ADU entrance exit sensors do not detect the paper at the fixed timing Paper jam E510 or E520 The 1st 2nd transport sensor and each sensors of PFP LCF are not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the feed clutch is turned ON Paper jam E220 E310 E320 E340 E360 E3D0 and E3E0 Error code differs depending on the paper source Refer to the error code table...

Page 74: ...when the power is turned OFF or the equipment boots up immediately after the settings warming up takes longer It differs depending on the usage conditions warming up will take approx 30 to 150 sec though it takes approx 20 sec if hibernation is performed normal situation The following are the conditions which necessitate a longer warming up time Rebooting from TopAccess First booting after power i...

Page 75: ...When paper jams and Call for service occur error codes are also displayed to notify users of the problem A 9 inch capacitive touch panel is used in this equipment resulting in the improvement of operability The ON OFF button is placed on the control panel and this button is used instead of the main power switch to turn the power ON OFF Press this button for at least 1 second to turn the power of t...

Page 76: ...ious corrective processes necessary for image formation After that arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal which is then transmitted to the data writing section In this equipment a reduction type CCD for color processing is used What this CCD differs from black and white CCDs is that its devices are arranged in 3 lines and covered with color filters Red Green and Blue These lines a...

Page 77: ...ass Original glass ADF original glass Carriage 1 Exposure lamp EXP Reflector Mirror 1 Carriage 2 Mirror 2 Mirror 3 Lens unit Lens CCD driving PC board CCD Automatic original detection sensor S1 Driving section Scan motor M1 2 phase stepping motor Driving the carriage 1 and carriage 2 Other Carriage home position sensor S3 Platen sensor 1 S20 Platen sensor 2 S21 ...

Page 78: ...under the ADF original glass by the carriage Do not use such solvents as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the ADF original glass because it is coated so as not to be scratched by originals 2 Carriage 1 Carriage 1 consists of the exposure lamp EXP reflector mirror 1 etc It is driven by the scan motor M1 and scans an original on the glass Fig 3 16 1 Exposure lamp 2 Reflector 3 Mirror 1 4 Origina...

Page 79: ...ce is also half that of the carriage 1 Fig 3 17 1 Mirror 2 2 Mirror 3 4 Lens unit The light reflected from the mirror 3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed in a position 5 CCD driving PC board CCD Processes such as signal amplification signal integration and A D conversion are applied on the electrical signal which was converted by CCD Fig 3 18 1 Lens 2 CCD board...

Page 80: ...nd carriage wire First the scan motor drives the carriages 1 and 2 to their respective home positions The home positions are detected when the carriage 1 passes the home position sensor S3 When the START button is pressed the both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass Scanning of an original placed on the RADF The carriage 1 stays at the shading position during shading correct...

Page 81: ...losed and its tilt angle reaches approx 20 degrees the platen sensor 1 S20 detects that the platen cover is closed Figure B When this status is detected the exposure lamp of the scanner emits light Then the emitted light is reflected by the original and read to the CCD as original size data The light reflected from an area with no original placed is very little a size in the primary scanning direc...

Page 82: ...ed OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 36 2 Detection points Sensor detection points A4 K Series Fig 3 21 Sensor detection points LT Series Fig 3 22 A5 R B5 R 16K R A4 R A3 B4 B5 8K A5 16K A4 Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 7 Size 5 Size 6 Size 8 S24 ST R ST LT R LG LD LT Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 S24 S25 ...

Page 83: ...o the digital image signals transmitted from the LGC board to create the latent image Image signal is converted into the light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving PC board LDR then radiated on the drum through the optical elements such as cylinder lenses polygonal mirror and f lens The unit must not be disassembled in the field as they are very sensitive to dust and finely adju...

Page 84: ... you are in no danger of being exposed to laser radiation The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the right front cover Fig 3 24 Cautions Avoid expose to laser beam during service This equipment uses a laser diode Be sure not to expose your eyes to the laser beam Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path Remove all reflecting metals su...

Page 85: ...al 16 1st drawer separation roller 3 Registration sensor S17 17 1st drawer paper width detection switch 4 1st 2nd transport sensor S16 18 1st drawer paper length detection switch 5 Bypass paper sensor S8 19 1st drawer detection switch 6 Bypass feed roller 20 2nd drawer tray up sensor S14 7 Bypass separation pad 21 2nd drawer empty sensor S15 8 Paper width detection PC board SFB 22 2nd drawer paper...

Page 86: ... tray up sensor S11 S14 1st 2nd drawer empty sensor S12 S15 1st 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT3 CLT4 Bypass unit Bypass feed roller PM parts Bypass separation pad PM parts Bypass paper sensor S8 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 Paper width detection PC board SFB Transport section other 1st 2nd drawer tray up motor M11 M12 Registration sensor S17 Registration roller rubber Registration roller metal 1st 2nd tran...

Page 87: ...ring of the bypass separation roller is greater than the frictional force between the sheets As a result the bypass separation roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transported any further When only one sheet of paper is transported the bypass separation roller is forced to rotate the feed roller 8 Bypass paper sensor S8 This sensor detects whether paper is set in the bypass tray o...

Page 88: ...d the drive from these clutches rotates the pickup rollers so as to pick up paper 15 Hi speed clutch CLT5 Drives the Transport roller at high speed by transmitting the drive from the main motor 16 Low speed clutch CLT6 Drives the Transport roller at low speed by transmitting the drive from the main motor 17 Registration roller clutch CLT1 Drives the registration roller 18 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 T...

Page 89: ... Description of Operation 1 Drive of rollers The drive of each motor in the paper feeding area activates the paper transfer roller as follows Paper feeding developer unit drive motor M2 1st 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT3 CLT4 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 Feed clutch H L CLT5 CLT6 1st 2nd drawer feed roller Feed roller Bypass feed roller ...

Page 90: ... tray up motor and paper can be fed When the driving force from the main motor is transmitted to the pickup roller feed roller and transport roller through the gears and clutches the paper is fed and transported Paper is picked up by the movement of the feed clutch When the feed clutch is turned ON the pickup roller and feed roller rotate and the paper is picked up from the drawer The paper is sep...

Page 91: ...e transport roller When transporting paper they are turned ON The Low speed transport clutch is turned ON when the low speed transportation is performed for printing The High speed transport clutch is turned ON when high speed transportation is performed to transport the paper which has passed through the paper feed sensor to the registration position High speed transportation is also performed wh...

Page 92: ...ed clutch 4 Bypass feed roller 5 Separation of paper This model is equipped with a separation roller which works to prevent multiple paper feeding The separation roller is pushed to the paper feed roller by the spring force When two or more sheets of paper are fed since the friction between two sheets of paper is smaller than that between a sheet and the separation roller the lower sheets are not ...

Page 93: ...er turns the paper feed sensor ON and the feed clutch is turned OFF Pick up roller and feed roller stop rotating The leading edge of paper turns the registration sensor ON and the paper is aligned by the registration rollers The high speed clutch is turned OFF and the transport roller stop rotating The registration motor and low speed clutch are turned ON and the paper is transported to the transf...

Page 94: ... roller upper lower drawer and bypass unit and registration roller The drive system is driven by the rotation of the main motor Fig 3 30 Toner motor M4 Registration roller clutch CLT1 Registration roller Bypass feed clutch CLT2 Bypass feed roller Hi speed clutch CLT5 Transport roller Low speed clutch CLT6 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT4 Drum 1st drawer 2nd drawer Main motor M8 1st drawer feed clutch C...

Page 95: ... the main motor through the gears and timing belt to the fuser unit gears The bridge unit the job separator and the offset tray are driven by transmitting from the fuser unit 4 Registration roller drive Drives the registration roller by transmitting the rotation of the main motor through the gears timing belt and clutches 5 Transport roller drive Drives the transport roller by transmitting the rot...

Page 96: ...m PM parts Main charger PM parts Cleaner Cleaning blade PM parts Recovery blade PM parts Needle electrode PM parts Discharge LED ERS Transfer roller unit Transfer roller PM parts Separation needle Other Drum thermistor THMS4 High voltage transformer HVPS TRU fan M9 Process unit fan M2 Ozone filter PM parts Cleaning blade Toner recovery auger Toner cartridge interface board CTIF board Drum thermist...

Page 97: ...causing it to be charged This phenomenon is called corona discharge At the same time a control bias is applied to the main charger grid to control the charging amount In a dark place negative charge is evenly applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge and this grid In addition a cleaner is installed to clean up the dust attached on the needle electrode Needle electrode The needle electr...

Page 98: ...nated The electrical potential of the drum surface is fixed to a certain amount before the drum is charged The number of the discharge LEDs for the 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm differs from that for the 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm because the discharging amount differs depending on the copy speed Therefore be sure to install discharge LEDs in a correct model 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 10 LEDs 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 14 LEDs 6 Drum t...

Page 99: ...driven by the main motor to rotate the mixers and developer sleeve Fig 3 33 3 13 2 Construction Developer unit Developer material PM parts Mixers 1 2 and 3 Developer sleeve Magnet roller Doctor blade Auto toner sensor S4 Drum thermistor THMS4 EPU memory board EPU Recovered toner supply mechanism Toner recycling auger Toner cartridge Toner cartridge PC board CTRG Toner cartridge interface PC board ...

Page 100: ...er to mix it with sufficient time Developer sleeve Magnetic roller This is an aluminum roller with a magnet inside The magnet works to absorb the developer material and forms the magnetic brush The magnet is fixed and only the sleeve around is rotated This rotation makes the magnetic brush of the developer sleeve sweep over the drum surface and perform development Doctor blade Doctor blade control...

Page 101: ... the process unit to a wrong model when replacing them because they are incompatible each other To distinguish them check the position of the bracket hole seen from the back side Fig 3 34 Parts 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm Toner recovery roller Not installed Installed Gear belt For low speed For high speed Discharge LED 10 LEDs 14 LEDs Needle electrode For low speed For high speed Position ...

Page 102: ...nit is mixed with developer material by the mixer 3 The mixer 3 is mounted exclusively for the recovered toner to mix it with sufficient time On the other hand the toner fresh transported into the developer unit from the toner cartridge is mixed by the mixer 2 Then the toner fresh and recovered toner are mixed together and further transported to the mixer 1 They are further mixed and transported t...

Page 103: ...ion after completion of fusing The fuser unit consists of the heater lamps fuser roller pressure roller separation fingers thermistors thermostat etc Fig 3 36 1 Fuser roller 2 Side heater lamp 3 Center heater lamp 4 Sub heater lamp 5 Heat roller center thermostat Heat roller front thermostat 6 Heat roller edge thermistor 7 Heat roller center thermistor 8 Heat roller side thermistor 9 Pressure roll...

Page 104: ... 14 2 Composition Center heater lamp LAMP1 600 W Side heater lamp LAMP2 600 W ub heater lamp LAMP3 300 W Heat roller center thermistor THM1 Heat roller side thermistor THM2 Heat roller edge thermistor THM3 Heat roller center thermostat THMO1 Heat roller front thermostat THMO2 Fuser roller Pressure roller Separation finger ...

Page 105: ...is fuser unit to enable envelopes to pass through The outside diameter of the pressure roller is ø30 mm for 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm and ø35 mm for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 4 Separation fingers The separation fingers are installed five above the pressure roller and five above the fuser roller in order to separate the paper adhered on each roller 5 Center thermistor Side thermistor This thermistor detects the te...

Page 106: ...ported to the inner tray paper exiting options or ADU through the exit roller In addition the heater lamps in the fuser roller do not structurally rotate 3 heater lamps having different functions each other are installed the center heater lamp applies heat to the center part of the fuser roller the side heater lamp applies heat to both ends of the roller and the sub heater lamp applies heat to the...

Page 107: ...n and the fuser roller is abnormally overheated as the result a relay OFF circuit transmits a relay OFF signal to turn off the relay and to turn the power OFF forcibly If the temperature control circuit does not function for some reason and the fuser roller is abnormally overheated as the result a forcible power OFF circuit transmits a reset signal to the power switch to turn the power OFF forcibl...

Page 108: ...the inner tray but the exit roller does not switchback For 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm the exit roller has the offset function and the paper position is shifted apart from one another back and forth The reverse section is only installed for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm It is a path only for switchbacking to the ADU to enhance the high speed printing The reverse section has the reverse gate which switches the transport...

Page 109: ... also used for the detection of a paper jam in the reverse section and the detection of the trailing edge of the reversed paper at duplex printing as well 4 Reverse motor M13 only installed for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm The reverse motor is a stepping motor which drives the reverse roller however this motor rotates reversely to switchback when the paper is transported to the upper exit area 5 Reverse roll...

Page 110: ... Drive 1 Exit Motor The figure shown below is the layout of the driving gears of the exit roller Fig 3 39 2 Reverse Motor only installed for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm The figure shown below is the layout of the driving gears of the reverse roller Fig 3 40 Reverse Forward Exit motor Exit roller Reverse motor Upper transport roller Reverse roller Reverse Forward ...

Page 111: ...pts the switchback method to transport the paper through the exit roller Immediately after printing on one side of the paper completing the fusion process the exit roller switchbacks to transport the reversed paper to the registration section to print on the other side The ADU for the 35 45 50 ppm models adopts the switchback method to transport the paper through the reverse section Immediately af...

Page 112: ... MACHINE 3 66 1 ADU motor 2 ADU entrance sensor 3 Upper transport roller 4 ADU exit sensor 5 Lower transport roller 6 Paper guide 3 16 2 Composition ADU motor M5 Stepping motor ADU entrance sensor S7 ADU exit sensor S6 Reverse sensor S18 ADU driving PC board ADU Upper transport roller Lower transport roller ...

Page 113: ...0 ppm models when the paper passes through the reserve sensor the reverse gate solenoid switches the reverse gate and the reverse roller switchbacks to transport the paper into the ADU The switchbacked paper is transported as its transport speed increases When it is transported to the ADU exit sensor the speed decreases After the paper is transported to the registration section the printing of the...

Page 114: ...ights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 68 3 16 5 Drive of ADU When the ADU motor M5 rotates the upper transport roller and lower transport roller are rotated driven by the gears and belt Fig 3 42 1 ADU motor 2 Gear 3 Timing belt 4 Upper transport roller 5 Timing belt 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 115: ...urned ON b Door switch line Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process being supplied via the interlock switch Two kinds of voltage 5VD and 24VD are output only when the main power switch of the equipment is turned ON and two doors front cover and ADU unit are closed 3 Heater lamp control circuit TRC Triac is driven by the heater control signal HTR1ON HTR2ON HTRASTON fr...

Page 116: ...overing signal SYS EN is output from the SYS board and then voltage starts being supplied to all the lines if no error was detected 5 Recovering from super sleep mode when receiving a packet When a packet from a network is received during the super sleep mode the mode is shifted to the sleep mode When packets are received frequently a control is performed to keep the sleep mode for a specified per...

Page 117: ...he equipment is not operable Normal state including Energy saving mode The main power switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board When the cover of the equipment is closed 24V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment enters into the ready printing state Sleep mode Since 24V DC voltages are not supplied but 12VA and 5VA DC voltages only the equipment does not enter...

Page 118: ...e The following are output channels for the cover switch line Cover switch line Connector Pin No Voltage Destination CN511 5 5VS SYS board RADF via SYS board 6 9 12VA 10 11 CN512 5 12VA LGC board 6 7 CN514 2 12VA PFC board Connector Pin No Voltage Destination CN512 17 24VD1 LGC board HVT via LGC board CFD board via LGC board ADU board via LGC board 18 19 24VD2 20 24VD3 CN513 1 24VD4 SYS board CN51...

Page 119: ... Tray up motor TRU fan Switching regulator cooling fan Auto toner sensor 1st drawer feed clutch 2nd drawer feed clutch Registration roller clutch High speed transport clutch Low speed transport clutch ADU clutch Discharge LED Main power switch High voltage transformer Bypass feed clutch ADU motor Exit motor Reverse motor 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm only REV gate solenoid 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm only Main motor SY...

Page 120: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 3 74 ...

Page 121: ...LACEMENT 4 1 4 DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 1 Covers 4 1 1 Front cover 4 1 2 Left cover 1 Open the front cover 2 Loosen 2 screws and pull out the front cover 1 at an angle toward the lower front side Fig 4 1 1 Open the front cover and pull out the 1st drawer 2 Remove 6 screws and take off the left cover 1 Fig 4 2 ...

Page 122: ... 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Remove the receiving tray 1 Fig 4 3 1 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 2 Remove the left rear cover P 4 3 4 1 6 Left rear cover 3 Remove the connecting port cover P 4 3 4 1 7 Connecting port cover 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the tray rear cover 1 by sliding it to the left Fig 4 4 Notes When installing insert the latch 2 into the hole in the frame Fig 4 5 ...

Page 123: ... REPLACEMENT 4 3 4 1 5 Left top cover 4 1 6 Left rear cover 4 1 7 Connecting port cover 1 Remove 2 screws and take off the left top cover 1 Fig 4 6 1 Remove 1 screw and take off the left rear cover 1 by lifting it up Fig 4 7 1 Open the side cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the connecting port cover 1 Fig 4 8 ...

Page 124: ... front cover 4 1 10 Right rear cover 1 Remove 3 screws and take off the top right cover 1 by lifting it up Fig 4 9 1 Open the side cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Pull out the 1st and 2nd drawers 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the right front cover 1 by lifting it up Fig 4 10 1 Open the side cover 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the right rear cover 1 Fig 4 11 ...

Page 125: ...ISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 5 4 1 11 Front top cover 4 1 12 Control panel lower cover 1 Remove 3 screws and take off the front top cover 1 by sliding it toward the left side Fig 4 12 1 Make the control panel 1 level Fig 4 13 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the control panel lower cover 2 Fig 4 14 ...

Page 126: ...r P 4 5 4 1 12 Control panel lower cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the front right cover 1 by lifting it up Fig 4 15 1 Remove the RADF or the platen cover 2 Remove the left top cover P 4 3 4 1 5 Left top cover 3 Remove the right top cover P 4 4 4 1 8 Right top cover 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the rear top cover 1 Fig 4 16 1 Remove 6 screws and take off the rear cover...

Page 127: ...ake off the front cover switch 1 Fig 4 18 1 Remove the front cover P 4 1 4 1 1 Front cover 2 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 3 Remove the right front cover P 4 4 4 1 9 Right front cover 4 Remove the front right cover P 4 6 4 1 13 Front right cover 5 Remove the developer unit P 4 102 4 8 1 Developer unit 6 Remove 5 screws and take off the inner cover 1 Fig 4 19 7 Disconnect 2 c...

Page 128: ...over 2 Remove the front top cover P 4 5 4 1 11 Front top cover 3 Remove the control panel lower cover P 4 5 4 1 12 Control panel lower cover 4 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 5 Remove the SYS board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 6 Disconnect 2 connectors from the SYS board 1 Fig 4 21 7 Release 2 harnesses 2 located under the scanner unit from 3 clamps Fig 4 22 8 Lower the control ...

Page 129: ...served e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 9 9 Remove 2 screws Take off the control panel unit 3 by sliding it Fig 4 24 Notes When installing pass the harness 2 through the harness clamp of the frame Fig 4 25 ...

Page 130: ...08A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 10 4 2 2 Hinge cover 1 Remove 4 screws Fig 4 26 2 Raise 2 hinges and remove the hinge cover 1 Fig 4 27 Fig 4 28 ...

Page 131: ...ND REPLACEMENT 4 11 4 2 3 USB harness signal harness 1 Remove the control panel unit P 4 8 4 2 1 Control panel unit 2 Remove the hinge cover P 4 10 4 2 2 Hinge cover 3 Lower 1 bracket and remove the USB harness signal harness 1 from 2 hooks Fig 4 29 Fig 4 30 4 Remove 6 screws and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 31 ...

Page 132: ... All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 12 5 Remove the harness from 2 hooks and disconnect connector 3 and 4 and then remove the USB harness signal harness 1 Fig 4 32 Fig 4 33 Notes When disconnecting the connector 4 release the lock 5 and disconnect it Fig 4 34 ...

Page 133: ...Y AND REPLACEMENT 4 13 4 2 4 KEY board button 1 Remove the control panel unit P 4 8 4 2 1 Control panel unit 2 Remove the hinge cover P 4 10 4 2 2 Hinge cover 3 Lower 1 hinge and then remove the USB harness signal harness 1 from 2 hooks Fig 4 35 Fig 4 36 4 Remove 6 screws and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 37 ...

Page 134: ...OSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 14 5 Remove 1 flat cable 3 and 2 screws and then remove the KEY board 4 Fig 4 38 Notes When removing the flat cable 3 release the lock by raising the latch and remove it Fig 4 39 ...

Page 135: ...4 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 15 6 Remove 6 buttons 5 Fig 4 40 Fig 4 41 ...

Page 136: ...nel unit 2 Remove the hinge cover P 4 10 4 2 2 Hinge cover 3 Remove the USB harness signal harness P 4 11 4 2 3 USB harness signal harness 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 42 5 Remove the leaf spring 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the flat cables 3 4 and 5 and then remove the DSP board 6 Fig 4 43 Notes When removing the flat cable 3 release 4 latches and remove it Fig 4 44 ...

Page 137: ...3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 17 When removing the flat cable 4 release the lock by raising the latch 7 and pull out the flat cable Fig 4 45 When removing the flat cable 5 release the lock by raising the latch 8 and pull out the flat cable Fig 4 46 ...

Page 138: ...1 Original glass 4 3 2 Lens cover 1 Remove the right top cover P 4 4 4 1 8 Right top cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the original glasses 1 and 2 Notes Make sure that the original glass 2 is securely inserted into the groove of the fixing part of the original glass 1 Securely insert 2 pins of the original glass 1 into the holes in the frame Fig 4 47 1 Remove the original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Or...

Page 139: ...w and disconnect 1 connector 1 and then take off the automatic original detection sensor 1 and 2 2 Notes A4 models are equipped only with automatic original detection sensor 1 and LT models are equipped with automatic original detection sensors 1 and 2 Fig 4 49 1 Remove the lens cover P 4 18 4 3 2 Lens cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the automatic original detection sensor with the bracket 1 F...

Page 140: ...ing it up slightly approx 7 degrees as shown in the right figure When connecting the flat cable 2 to the connector insert the flat cable straightly and lock it securely Confirm that the tabs are in the positions shown in the right figure Fig 4 52 Notes When installing the flat cable 2 do not push it in strongly When installing the flat cable 2 be careful not to insert it at an angle Do not apply p...

Page 141: ...djusted finely so the re adjustment or replacement of some parts are impossible in the field The lens unit must be replaced on a unit basis 2 Handle the lens unit with care Do not hold the adjustment unit or lens 3 Count the number of lines 4 and write it down for later reference before removing the CCD lens unit When installing the CCD lens unit the same number of lines needs to be visible Fig 4 ...

Page 142: ...Carriage home position sensor S3 Notes When replacing the lens unit do not touch the screws 7 places Fig 4 56 Fig 4 57 1 Remove the original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the rear top cover P 4 6 4 1 14 Rear top cover 3 Disconnect 1 connector 1 4 Release 3 latches and remove the carriage home position sensor 2 Fig 4 58 ...

Page 143: ...e original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the front top cover P 4 5 4 1 11 Front top cover 3 Move carriage 1 1 to a place where you can see the screw 2 through the frame hole Notes Do not remove the black screw which can be seen through the frame hole To move the carriage manually rotate the drive pulley 3 Fig 4 59 Fig 4 60 4 Remove 1 screw 2 Fig 4 61 ...

Page 144: ...an motor M1 5 Remove the flat cable 5 by sliding the front side of the exposure lamp 4 toward the direction of the arrow shown in the figure Remove the exposure lamp 4 from the front side Fig 4 62 1 Take off the rear top cover P 4 6 4 1 14 Rear top cover 2 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 3 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 63 ...

Page 145: ...4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 25 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the scan motor assembly 1 Notes When installing the scan motor use the belt tension jig P 6 51 6 9 3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor Fig 4 64 5 Remove 2 screws and take off the scan motor 2 Fig 4 65 ...

Page 146: ...SSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 26 4 3 8 Platen sensor S20 S21 1 Remove the rear top cover P 4 6 4 1 14 Rear top cover 2 Remove 5 screws Fig 4 66 Fig 4 67 3 Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the platen sensor assembly 1 Notes When installing be careful not to connect each different connector Fig 4 68 ...

Page 147: ...tches and remove the platen sensor 1 2 and 2 3 Fig 4 69 1 Remove the original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove the front top cover P 4 5 4 1 11 Front top cover 3 Move carriage 1 1 to the leftmost side Make sure that the screws on carriage 1 can be seen from the frame holes 2 Fig 4 70 Notes To move the carriage manually rotate the drive pulley 3 Fig 4 71 ...

Page 148: ... 4 Remove 2 screws from the frame holes 2 Fig 4 72 5 Remove the flat cable 4 from the carriage 1 1 6 Remove the flat cable 4 from the harness guide 5 Fig 4 73 7 Slide the front of the carriage 1 1 toward the direction of the arrow shown in the figure while trying not to touch the mirror 6 Then remove the carriage 1 1 Fig 4 74 ...

Page 149: ...tall the flat cable 4 to the harness guide 5 When installing make sure that the wire 7 is placed on the notch 8 of carriage 1 After installing move carriage 1 to the leftmost side and check the flat cable 4 for any twists Fig 4 75 Fig 4 76 1 Remove carriage 1 P 4 27 4 3 9 Carriage 1 2 Move carriage 2 to the center 3 Attach the wire holder jig 2 to the wire pulley 1 to prevent the wire from coming ...

Page 150: ...ould come out of the slot of the wire holder jig 2 and be passed under the jig arm 3 3 When installing the wire holder jig be careful of the orientation Fig 4 78 4 Remove the tension springs 4 in the front and rear sides 5 Remove the carriage wire 5 Fig 4 79 6 Rotate carriage 2 6 while trying not to touch the mirror Then remove carriage 2 6 Notes Replace mirror 2 and 3 together with carriage 2 6 D...

Page 151: ...the right when replacing the carriage wire 1 Wire pulley 2 Carriage wire 3 Carriage 2 4 Idler pulley 5 Hook 6 Tension spring 7 Front side 8 Rear side Notes It is not necessary to adjust the carriage wire tension since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires through the tension springs Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal Fig 4 81 Fig 4 82 3 4 6 1 5 2 7 3 4 6 1 5 2 8 ...

Page 152: ... 7 Black 8 Silver Notes When winding the wire onto the pulley be sure to note the following Do not twist the wire Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them Fig 4 83 Fig 4 84 3 After winding the wires around the pulleys attach the wire holder jigs to ...

Page 153: ...SSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 33 4 3 11 Scanner damp heater DH2 Notes Turn the power of the equipment OFF and unplug the power cable before the disassembly and installation 1 Remove the original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Original glass 2 Remove 1 connector 1 Fig 4 86 3 Remove the scanner damp heater 2 Fig 4 87 ...

Page 154: ...d DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 34 4 4 Writing Section 4 4 1 Laser optical unit 1 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 2 Disconnect 1 connector of the duct 1 Fig 4 88 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the duct 1 Fig 4 89 4 Remove the sponge 3 from the laser optical unit 2 Fig 4 90 ...

Page 155: ... 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 35 5 Disconnect 1 connector 4 Fig 4 91 6 Remove the flat cable 6 from the harness guide 5 7 Remove the flat cable 6 from the laser optical unit Fig 4 92 8 Remove 1 screw and take off the laser optical unit 2 Fig 4 93 ...

Page 156: ...ake an impact or vibration on the laser optical unit because it is a precise apparatus 3 Place the removed laser optical unit so as not to load on the polygonal motor 4 Do not disassemble the laser optical unit in the field because it is precisely adjusted and very sensitive to dust and stain 5 Hold the laser optical unit vertically Do not press the top of the unit where the polygonal motor is ins...

Page 157: ...it 1 Remove the right front cover P 4 4 4 1 9 Right front cover 2 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 3 Close the side cover 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the stay 1 Fig 4 95 5 Open the bypass tray 2 and pull out the slide tray 3 Fig 4 96 6 Remove 1 screw from back side of the bypass tray Take off the paper size detection board cover 4 Fig 4 97 ...

Page 158: ...tes When removing the paper size detection board cover 4 be careful not to drop the gear 5 Fig 4 98 7 Disconnect 1 connector from the paper size detection board cover Fig 4 99 8 Move the projection portion 7 on the front side and the rear side of the bypass unit 6 to the wider part of the groove of the hinge stoppers 8 Fig 4 100 ...

Page 159: ...8A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 39 4 5 2 Bypass feed roller 9 Remove the arm 9 and paper holder release levers 10 Fig 4 101 10 Disconnect 1 connector and take off the bypass tray unit 6 Fig 4 102 1 Open the bypass tray 1 2 Tip the paper holder release lever 2 to release the pressure Fig 4 103 ...

Page 160: ...SHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 40 3 Remove the stopper 4 from the bypass feed roller 3 Fig 4 104 4 Press the collar 5 toward the rear side to release the lock Fig 4 105 5 Remove the bypass feed roller 3 Fig 4 106 ...

Page 161: ...A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 41 6 Remove the collar 5 from the bypass feed roller 3 Fig 4 107 Notes When installing the bypass feed roller 3 fit the convex portion on the roller with the concave portion on the equipment Fig 4 108 3 ...

Page 162: ...tion roller 1 Remove the bypass feed roller P 4 39 4 5 2 Bypass feed roller 2 Lift the bypass separation roller 1 to remove it Notes When installing removing do not twist the film Handle the bypass separation roller with care so that no dirt oils or stains adhere Be careful not to drop the parts inside the equipment Fig 4 109 Fig 4 110 Fig 4 111 ...

Page 163: ...rd Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the bushings 2 of the bypass separation roller Fig 4 112 1 Open the bypass tray 1 and pull out the slide tray 2 Fig 4 113 2 Remove 1 screw from back side of the bypass tray Take off the paper size detection board cover 3 Fig 4 114 2 ...

Page 164: ...ass paper sensor S8 Notes When removing the paper size detection board cover 3 be careful not to drop the gear 4 Fig 4 115 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the paper size detection board 5 Fig 4 116 1 Remove the bypass feed clutch P 4 151 4 12 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 2 Remove 2 screws from the automatic duplexing unit 1 Fig 4 117 ...

Page 165: ...8A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 45 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the paper guide lower 2 Fig 4 118 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the paper guide middle 3 Fig 4 119 5 Remove the stopper 5 from the bypass feed roller 4 Fig 4 120 ...

Page 166: ...reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 46 6 Press the flange 6 inside and remove the bypass feed roller 4 Fig 4 121 7 Remove the clip 7 Slide the shaft 8 toward the front side and remove the shaft 8 Remove the collar 9 Fig 4 122 8 Release the harness 10 from the harness guide Fig 4 123 ...

Page 167: ...AND REPLACEMENT 4 47 4 5 6 ADU opening closing switch SW5 9 Disconnect 1 connector 11 10 Release the latch and then remove the bypass paper sensor 12 and sensor arm 13 Fig 4 124 1 Open the side cover 2 Release 2 hooks Fig 4 125 3 Pull out the ADU opening closing switch 1 and disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 126 ...

Page 168: ...MENT 4 48 4 5 7 Registration sensor S17 1st transport sensor S16 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 149 4 12 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 3 Disconnect 1 connector 1 Fig 4 127 4 Open the feed cover 2 Fig 4 128 5 Remove 4 screws and take off the stay 3 Fig 4 129 ...

Page 169: ...A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 49 6 Remove 1 screw from the transport guide 4 Fig 4 130 7 Release 2 latches 5 Slide the transport guide 4 toward the front side and then pull the transport guide 4 out toward you Fig 4 131 8 Remove 1 screw from the paper guide 6 Fig 4 132 ...

Page 170: ... by sliding it toward the front side Fig 4 133 10 Release 2 latches and remove the sensor bracket 7 Fig 4 134 11 Disconnect 2 connectors Remove the 1st transport sensor 8 and registration sensor 9 Notes When installing connectors connect the black wire harness to the 1st transport sensor 8 and the blue wire harness to the registration sensor 9 Fig 4 135 ...

Page 171: ... registration roller clutch P 4 80 4 5 37 Registration roller clutch CLT1 2 Open the side cover 3 Remove the clip 2 from the registration roller 1 Fig 4 136 4 Slide the registration roller 1 to the rear side and then remove 1 bushing 3 on the front side Remove the registration roller 1 Fig 4 137 5 Remove 1 stopper 4 1 E ring 5 1 pin 6 and 1 gear 7 from the registration roller 1 Fig 4 138 ...

Page 172: ...n roller on the ADU side 1 Remove the transfer unit P 4 114 4 9 1 Transfer unit 2 Remove 1 screw while holding the shaft of the registration roller 1 and then remove the bracket 2 Fig 4 139 3 Remove 1 screw while holding the shaft of the registration roller 3 and then remove the bracket 4 Fig 4 140 4 Remove the registration roller 5 Fig 4 141 ...

Page 173: ...08A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 53 4 5 10 Feed cover 5 Remove 2 washers 6 1 E ring 7 1 gear 8 and 1 pin 9 from the registration roller 5 Fig 4 142 1 Open the feed cover 1 Fig 4 143 2 Disconnect 1 connector 2 and remove the stopper 3 Fig 4 144 ...

Page 174: ...e rear side toward the front side Remove the feed cover 1 while turning the feed cover 1 in the direction of the arrow Fig 4 145 1 Remove the low speed transport clutch P 4 78 4 5 33 Low speed transport clutch CLT6 2 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 149 4 12 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 3 Open the feed cover 1 Fig 4 146 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the stay 2 Fig 4 147 ...

Page 175: ...08A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 55 5 Remove 1 screw from the transport guide 3 Fig 4 148 6 Release 2 latches 4 Slide the transport guide 3 to the front side and then remove it by pulling it toward you Fig 4 149 7 Remove the clip from the transport roller 5 Fig 4 150 ...

Page 176: ... 4 5 12 Feed cover opening closing switch SW10 8 Remove the transport roller 5 by sliding the bushing 6 toward the front side Fig 4 151 9 Remove the 2 bushings 7 1 clip 8 1 E ring 9 and 1 gear 10 Fig 4 152 1 Remove the feed cover P 4 53 4 5 10 Feed cover 2 Remove 4 screws Release 3 latches 1 and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 153 ...

Page 177: ... 13 2nd transport sensor S9 3 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Release the latch and remove the feed cover opening closing switch 4 Fig 4 154 1 Remove the feed cover P 4 53 4 5 10 Feed cover 2 Remove 4 screws Release 3 latches 1 and take off the cover 2 Fig 4 155 3 Disconnect 1 connector 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 4 Fig 4 156 ...

Page 178: ...it 4 Release the latch and remove the 2nd transport sensor 5 Fig 4 157 1 Pull out the 1st drawer 2 Remove the front cover P 4 1 4 1 1 Front cover 3 Tilt the lock lever 1 clockwise Pull out the 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 toward you to remove it Notes When installing align the arrow of the 1st drawer paper feed unit with the guide before inserting Fig 4 158 ...

Page 179: ... 15 1st drawer separation roller guide 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove 2 screws from the 1st drawer separation roller guide 1 Fig 4 159 3 Release two latches and remove the 1st drawer separation roller guide 1 Fig 4 160 4 Remove the E ring and take off the shaft 2 Fig 4 161 ...

Page 180: ...T 4 60 5 Remove the shaft cover 3 Fig 4 162 Notes When replacing the parts or performing preventive maintenance apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the place 4 shown in the figure and apply half a rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the 2 places 5 shown in the figure Fig 4 163 4 5 ...

Page 181: ...out the 1st drawer 2 Pull out the 2nd drawer 3 Tilt the lock lever 1 clockwise Pull out the 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 toward you to remove it Notes When installing align the arrow of the 2nd drawer paper feed unit with the guide before inserting Fig 4 164 1 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove 2 screws from the 2nd drawer separation roller guid...

Page 182: ...TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 62 3 Release 2 latches and remove the 2nd drawer separation roller guide 1 Fig 4 166 4 Remove the E ring and take off the shaft 2 Fig 4 167 5 Remove the shaft cover 3 Fig 4 168 ...

Page 183: ...ive maintenance apply 1 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the place 4 shown in the figure and apply half a rice sized grain of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the 2 places 5 shown in the figure Fig 4 169 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Slide the guide 1 to the front side Fig 4 170 3 Release 3 latches and remove the separation rol...

Page 184: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 64 Separation roller Fig 4 172 Feed roller Fig 4 173 Pick up roller Fig 4 174 ...

Page 185: ... 19 2nd drawer paper feed roller separation roller and pick up roller 1 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 2 Slide the guide 1 to the front side Fig 4 175 3 Release the roller latch and remove the separation roller 2 feed roller 3 and pick up roller 4 Fig 4 176 Separation roller Fig 4 177 ...

Page 186: ...Feed roller Fig 4 178 Pick up roller Fig 4 179 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the upper tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit 4 Disconnect 1 connector 1 from the rear side and then release 2 latches Fig 4 180 ...

Page 187: ...he front side Fig 4 181 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the lower tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 23 Lower tray up motor unit 4 Disconnect 1 connector 1 from the rear side and then release 2 latches Fig 4 182 5 Remove the 2nd drawer detection switch 2 from the fr...

Page 188: ...wer tray up motor unit 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 and then release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 184 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the upper tray up motor unit 2 Fig 4 185 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 and then release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 186 ...

Page 189: ...BLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 69 4 5 24 Upper tray up motor M11 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the lower tray up motor unit 2 Fig 4 187 1 Remove the upper tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit 2 Release 4 latches and remove the cover 1 Fig 4 188 3 Take off the upper tray up motor 2 Fig 4 189 ...

Page 190: ... 4 5 26 1st drawer paper stock sensor S10 1 Remove the lower tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 23 Lower tray up motor unit 2 Release 4 latches and then remove the cover 1 Fig 4 190 3 Take off the lower tray up motor 2 Fig 4 191 1 Remove the upper tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit 2 Release 4 latches and then remove the cover 1 Fig 4 192 ...

Page 191: ...7 2nd drawer paper stock sensor S13 3 Release 3 latches and then remove the 1st drawer paper stock sensor 2 Fig 4 193 1 Remove the lower tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 23 Lower tray up motor unit 2 Release 4 latches and then remove the cover 1 Fig 4 194 3 Release 3 latches and then remove the 2nd drawer paper stock sensor 2 Fig 4 195 ...

Page 192: ... unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the tray up motor units P 4 68 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 23 Lower tray up motor unit 4 Release 1 latch Fig 4 196 5 Feed out the sensor holder 1 to the rear side and then remove it Fig 4 197 Notes When installing fix it using the sensor holder pro...

Page 193: ... When installing connectors connect the white connector to the 1st drawer empty sensor 4 and the yellow connector to the 1st drawer tray up sensor 5 Fig 4 199 1 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed unit P 4 58 4 5 14 1st drawer paper feed unit 2 Remove the 2nd drawer paper feed unit P 4 61 4 5 16 2nd drawer paper feed unit 3 Remove the upper tray up motor unit P 4 68 4 5 22 Upper tray up motor unit 4 ...

Page 194: ... 4 202 6 Disconnect 2 connectors Remove the 2nd drawer empty sensor 4 and the 2nd drawer tray up sensor 5 Notes When installing connectors connect the white connector to the 2nd drawer empty sensor 4 and the yellow connector to the 2nd drawer tray up sensor 5 Fig 4 203 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 1 spring 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 Notes When installing connec...

Page 195: ...st drawer paper width detection switch 4 and 1st drawer paper length detection switch 5 Fig 4 205 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 1 spring 1 and disconnect 2 connectors 2 Notes When installing connect the yellow harness connector to the left side 3 Release the latch and remove the switch holder 3 Fig 4 206 4 Release the latch and remove the 2nd drawer paper width detection...

Page 196: ...Y AND REPLACEMENT 4 76 4 5 32 High speed transport clutch CLT5 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 3 connectors 1 and release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 208 3 Remove 3 clips Fig 4 209 4 Remove 3 bushings and 2 screws 2 and then take off the clutch cover 3 Fig 4 210 ...

Page 197: ...RATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 77 5 Remove the high speed transport clutch 4 Notes When installing the clutch attach a rotation stopper Fig 4 211 Fig 4 212 ...

Page 198: ...1st drawer feed clutch CLT3 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 Remove 1 clip and the low speed transport clutch 2 Notes When installing the clutch attach a rotation stopper to the clutch cover Fig 4 213 Fig 4 214 1 Remove the clutch cover P 4 76 4 5 32 High speed transport clutch CLT5 2 Remove the 1st drawer feed clutch 1 Fig 4 215 ...

Page 199: ... REPLACEMENT 4 79 4 5 35 2nd drawer feed clutch CLT4 Notes When installing the clutch attach a rotation stopper Fig 4 216 1 Remove the clutch cover P 4 76 4 5 32 High speed transport clutch CLT5 2 Remove the 2nd drawer feed clutch 1 Notes When installing the clutch attach a rotation stopper Fig 4 217 Fig 4 218 ...

Page 200: ...r clutch CLT1 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the flywheel 1 Fig 4 219 1 Remove the flywheel P 4 80 4 5 36 Flywheel 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 Remove the clip and take off the registration roller clutch 2 Fig 4 220 Notes When installing the registration roller clutch attach a rotation stopper to the clutch cover Fig 4 221 ...

Page 201: ...REPLACEMENT 4 81 4 5 38 Paper feed drive unit 1 Remove the low speed transport clutch P 4 78 4 5 33 Low speed transport clutch CLT6 2 Disconnect 3 connectors 3 Fig 4 222 3 Remove 1 harness clamp 1 and disconnect 1 connector 2 4 Release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 223 5 Remove the spring 3 Fig 4 224 ...

Page 202: ...MBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 82 4 5 39 Paper feed drive gear 6 Remove 3 screws and take off the paper feed drive unit 4 Notes When replacing the gear remove the clutch cover Fig 4 225 1 Remove the paper feed drive unit P 4 81 4 5 38 Paper feed drive unit 2 Remove 3 clips and take off 3 bushings 1 Fig 4 226 ...

Page 203: ...A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 83 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the clutch cover 2 Fig 4 227 4 Remove the 1st drawer paper feed clutch 3 2nd drawer paper feed clutch 4 and high speed transport clutch 5 Notes When installing the clutch attach a rotation stopper Fig 4 228 Fig 4 229 ...

Page 204: ...ASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 84 5 Remove 5 screws and take off the paper feed drive gear cover 6 Fig 4 230 Notes When replacing the parts or performing machine refreshment apply 2 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the shaft 7 Fig 4 231 6 Remove the paper feed drive gear Fig 4 232 ...

Page 205: ...T 4 85 4 6 Driving section 4 6 1 Main motor M8 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 4 6 2 Main motor M8 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 1 Remove the flywheel P 4 80 4 5 36 Flywheel 2 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 233 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the main motor 1 Fig 4 234 1 Remove the flywheel P 4 80 4 5 36 Flywheel 2 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 235 ...

Page 206: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 86 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the main motor 1 Fig 4 236 ...

Page 207: ...DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 87 4 7 Drum Related Section 4 7 1 Process unit 1 Open the side cover 2 Open the front cover 3 Push down the lever 1 and remove the toner cartridge 2 by pulling it toward you Fig 4 237 4 Loosen 2 screws and remove the process unit 3 by pulling it toward you Fig 4 238 ...

Page 208: ...RATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 88 4 7 2 Drum cleaner unit 1 Remove the process unit P 4 87 4 7 1 Process unit 2 Remove the harness cover 1 by sliding it downward Fig 4 239 3 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 240 4 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 241 ...

Page 209: ... 5 Release the harness from the harness guide 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the process unit front cover 3 Fig 4 242 6 Lift up the drum cleaner unit 4 and take it off Notes 1 Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface at this time 2 Do not deform the guide film 5 of developer unit by touching this Fig 4 243 Fig 4 244 ...

Page 210: ...se 1 latch and take off the discharge LED unit 1 Notes Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface at this time Fig 4 245 3 Release the harness 2 from the harness guide and pull out the discharge LED 3 Notes The number of the discharge LEDs for 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm differs from that for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm therefore do not install the LEDs in a wrong model Fig 4 246 Fig 4 247 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm ...

Page 211: ...8A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 91 4 7 4 Main charger 1 Remove the discharge LED unit P 4 90 4 7 3 Discharge LED 2 Push the lever 1 and pull out the main charger 2 Notes Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface at this time Fig 4 248 ...

Page 212: ...harger cleaner 1 Remove the main charger P 4 91 4 7 4 Main charger 2 Remove the spring 1 and take off the main charger grid 2 Notes Do not touch the mesh area of the grid Fig 4 249 1 Remove the main charger P 4 91 4 7 4 Main charger 2 Release the main charger cleaner 1 from the hooks 2 Then rotate the main charger cleaner 1 at 90 degrees to take it off Fig 4 250 ...

Page 213: ...electrode 1 Remove the main charger grid P 4 92 4 7 5 Main charger grid 2 Remove the main charger cleaner P 4 92 4 7 6 Main charger cleaner 3 Release the latch and remove the terminal cover 1 at front side 4 Remove the terminal cover 2 at rear side Fig 4 251 5 Remove the terminal 3 and spring 4 Then take off the needle electrode 5 Fig 4 252 ...

Page 214: ... hands 2 Make sure not to hold or bend the needle electrode 5 3 The form of the needle electrode 5 differs depending on the model as shown in the figure Do not mix them when installing Fig 4 253 1 Take off the main charger P 4 91 4 7 4 Main charger 2 Rotate the lever 2 while pushing the latch 1 Remove the lever 2 by pulling it toward you Fig 4 254 3 55 mm 2 5 mm 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm...

Page 215: ...Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off 3 Be careful not to touch or scratch the edge of the cleaning blade 4 Be sure to apply patting powder lubricant to the entire surface of the drum when it is replaced or it is installed removed from the cleaner Fig 4 255 1 Remove the drum P 4 94 4 7 8 Drum 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the drum cleaning blade 1 Notes Be careful not to tou...

Page 216: ... unit to take off the drum separation finger units 1 3 pc Notes 1 When replacing the drum separation fingers make sure that the drum has been taken off first since the fingers may scratch the drum surface Fig 4 257 3 Remove the spring 2 and take off the drum separation fingers 3 Notes When the drum separation fingers have been replaced check if the pressure movement is normal by moving them with y...

Page 217: ... blade 1 with the bracket Notes When cleaning the inside of the cleaner unit be careful of the following in order not to damage the films 3 attached on the toner recovery auger 2 1 Do not use an air blower for cleaning Use a vacuum cleaner 2 When using a vacuum cleaner be careful not to hit the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner to the films 3 3 When rotating the toner recovery auger 2 rotate it only in...

Page 218: ... 13 Toner motor M4 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Release 1 latch 1 and remove the temperature humidity sensor 2 Fig 4 262 3 Disconnect 1 connector from the temperature humidity sensor 2 Fig 4 263 1 Remove the flywheel P 4 80 4 5 36 Flywheel 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 and remove 1 screw and then take off the toner motor 2 with the bracket Fig 4 264 ...

Page 219: ...ocess unit fan M2 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the toner motor 2 Notes Pay attention to the size length of the screws If incorrect ones are used the motor could be damaged Fig 4 265 1 Remove the receiving tray P 4 2 4 1 3 Receiving tray 2 Disconnect 1 connector on the duct 1 Fig 4 266 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the duct 1 Fig 4 267 ...

Page 220: ... 15 SYS HDD cooling fan M6 4 Release 8 latches and remove the duct cover 2 Fig 4 268 5 Remove the process unit fan 3 by lifting up Fig 4 269 1 Remove the SYS board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 2 Disconnect 1 connector 1 from the SYS board 3 Lift 2 latches and remove the SYS HDD cooling fan 2 by sliding it toward you Fig 4 270 ...

Page 221: ...the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Release 1 latch 1 and remove the temperature humidity sensor 2 Fig 4 271 3 Remove 2 screws and disconnect 1 connector 3 and then take off the switching regulator cooling fan 4 Fig 4 272 Notes Be sure to unplug the power cable before starting this work 1 Remove the left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Disconnect 4 connectors and remove the main power switch 1...

Page 222: ...8 Developer Unit 4 8 1 Developer unit Notes Make sure to perform 05 2390 and take off the process unit before the developer material is replaced 1 Take out the process unit P 4 87 4 7 1 Process unit 2 Remove the harness cover 1 by sliding it downward Fig 4 274 3 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 275 4 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 276 ...

Page 223: ... the harness from the harness guide 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the process unit front cover 3 Fig 4 277 6 Lift up the drum cleaner unit 4 and separate it from developer unit 5 Notes 1 Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface at this time 2 Do not deform the guide film 6 of developer unit by touching this Fig 4 278 Fig 4 279 ...

Page 224: ...d take it off Fig 4 280 Notes When installing the developer unit upper cover make sure that the side seal comes between the developer unit upper cover and rubber seal on the cover Fig 4 281 3 Remove the developer material from rear side Notes 1 When removing the developer material be careful not to drop the developer material on the gears of the developer unit 2 When cleaning the developer unit ne...

Page 225: ...le 2 Rotate the gear on the rear side of the developer unit to the direction of the arrow while filling the developer unit with the developer material Spread out the developer material over the developer sleeve Fig 4 283 1 Remove the developer material P 4 104 4 8 2 Removing developer material 2 Place the developer unit upside down Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 284 3 Remove 1 screw Then take off t...

Page 226: ...veloper material P 4 104 4 8 2 Removing developer material 2 Place the developer unit upside down Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 286 3 Take off the auto toner sensor by rotating it Fig 4 287 1 Remove the developer material P 4 104 4 8 2 Removing developer material 2 Disconnect 1 connector remove 1 screw and take off the drum thermistor Fig 4 288 Connector Auto toner sensor Connector Drum thermistor ...

Page 227: ...eveloper material P 4 104 4 8 2 Removing developer material 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the recovered toner supply unit Fig 4 289 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the recovered toner drive unit Remove 1 gear Fig 4 290 4 Remove 2 plate springs fixing the doctor sleeve on its both ends Fig 4 291 Recovered toner supply unit Gear Recovered toner drive unit Plate spring Plate spring ...

Page 228: ...screw and plate spring only the developer unit for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 7 Remove 1 screw and take off the polarity adjustment lever Notes Make a note of the position where the polarity adjustment lever is pointing Mark the position if needed When reassembling match the polarity adjustment lever with the previously marked position on the scale Fig 4 293 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket Fig 4...

Page 229: ...A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 109 10 Remove 1 E ring Remove the arm and cam Fig 4 296 11 Remove 1 screw and the gear Fig 4 297 12 Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket Fig 4 298 13 Take off 3 gears and 1 timing belt Fig 4 299 E ring Arm Cam Gear Bracket Bearing Timing belt Gear ...

Page 230: ...SASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 110 14 Remove 1 pin and 1 pulley 15 Take off the guide roller on the rear side Fig 4 300 16 Remove the seal on the front side Remove 1 E ring and 1 bushing Fig 4 301 17 Take off the developer sleeve Fig 4 302 Pulley Guide roller Pin Seal E ring Bushing Developer sleeve ...

Page 231: ... Mixer 1 Take off the developer sleeve P 4 107 4 8 7 Guide roller Developer sleeve 2 Take off the doctor sleeve Fig 4 303 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the holder Fig 4 304 4 Remove 2 bushings and 2 oil seals from the holder Replacement of Oil Seal P 4 113 4 8 9 Replacement of oil seal Fig 4 305 Doctor sleeve Holder Oil seal Bushing ...

Page 232: ... 2 bushings and 2 oil seals on the front side Replacement of Oil Seal P 4 113 4 8 9 Replacement of oil seal Fig 4 307 7 Remove the end section of the mixer 1 8 Remove the bushing and oil seal Replacement of Oil Seal P 4 113 4 8 9 Replacement of oil seal Fig 4 308 9 Take off the mixer 1 Fig 4 309 Mixer 3 Mixer 2 Oil seal Bushing Oil seal Bushing End section of mixer 1 Mixer 1 ...

Page 233: ... Replacement of Oil Seal P 4 113 4 8 9 Replacement of oil seal Fig 4 310 1 Insert a fine screwdriver into the depression of the oil seal to take it out 2 Push in a new oil seal parallel to the frame or bushing shown figure at right 3 Apply the grease Alvania No 2 amount of 2 rice grains on entire surface of the oil seal evenly Notes Wipe off the excessive grease Fig 4 311 Oil seal Bushing Outside ...

Page 234: ...sfer unit 4 9 1 Transfer unit Notes When removing the transfer unit remove the process unit and avoid a direct sunlight onto the drum 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 149 4 12 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket 1 Fig 4 312 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the transfer unit 2 Fig 4 313 ...

Page 235: ... 9 2 TRU fan M9 1 Remove the transfer unit P 4 114 4 9 Transfer unit 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the inner duct 1 Fig 4 314 3 Disconnect 1 connector 2 4 Peel off the double faced tape and then remove the TRU fan 3 Fig 4 315 Notes When installing pass the harness 4 through the harness guide as shown in the right figure Fig 4 316 ...

Page 236: ...ND REPLACEMENT 4 116 4 9 3 Transfer roller unit 4 9 4 Transfer roller 1 Open the side cover 2 Release the hook on the rear side and then remove the transfer roller unit 1 Fig 4 317 1 Remove the transfer roller unit P 4 116 4 9 3 Transfer roller unit 2 Release 4 latches on the transfer roller unit Fig 4 318 ...

Page 237: ...8A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 117 3 Remove the transfer roller 1 Fig 4 319 4 Remove 2 collars 2 1 gear 3 and 2 stoppers 4 from the transfer roller 1 Notes When installing the bushing and gear be careful of the orientation Fig 4 320 ...

Page 238: ...ISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 118 4 9 5 Separation needle 1 Remove the transfer roller unit P 4 116 4 9 3 Transfer roller unit 2 Peel off the double faced tape and then remove the cover 1 Fig 4 321 Notes When installing insert the cover 1 into the lower side of the power supply plate 2 Fig 4 322 ...

Page 239: ...ts reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 119 4 9 6 Ozone filter 3 Remove the separation needle 3 while trying not to deform it Fig 4 323 1 Open the side cover 2 Open the transfer unit 1 Fig 4 324 ...

Page 240: ...008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 120 3 Remove the cover 2 by sliding it toward you Fig 4 325 4 Remove the ozone filter 3 Fig 4 326 ...

Page 241: ... new fuser unit is installed be sure to check whether the fuser related life counter values have been cleared in the list printing mode or the setting mode 08 When disassembling the fuser unit or replacing any parts in it be sure that the wire harness is correctly set and also be careful not to catch it between other parts 1 Open the side cover 2 Press down the lever 1 and remove the fuser unit 2 ...

Page 242: ...MENT 4 122 Notes When installing the fuser unit be sure to press it in until the lever goes up If the lever goes down the fuser unit has not been correctly installed H is marked on the fuser unit for 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm for identification L is marked on the fuser unit for 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm Fig 4 328 Fig 4 329 Fig 4 330 ...

Page 243: ... 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the front side cover 1 Fig 4 331 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the rear side cover 1 Notes When installing the cover put the harness into the harness guide so that it will not be pinched by the cover Fig 4 332 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the ...

Page 244: ...over P 4 123 4 10 2 Front side cover 2 Remove the rear side cover P 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the paper entrance guide 1 Fig 4 334 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the brush 2 Fig 4 335 1 Remove the front side cover P 4 123 4 10 2 Front side cover 2 Remove the rear side cover P 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the pressure roller cover 1 Fi...

Page 245: ...d take off the cover 2 Fig 4 337 5 Remove 5 springs 3 and take off the 5 separation finger 4 Fig 4 338 Notes Remove the separation finger in the following procedure 1 Lift up the separation finger and slide it toward you 2 Slide the separation finger toward the front side and turn it as twist 3 Remove the separation finger from the groove Fig 4 339 ...

Page 246: ...SEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 126 4 10 7 Exit sensor S5 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Tilt the pressure lever 1 3 Remove 2 screws and open the pressure roller cover 2 Fig 4 340 4 Release 1 latch and take off the sensor cover 3 Fig 4 341 5 Remove the actuator 4 and spring 5 Fig 4 342 ...

Page 247: ...ostat THMO1 fuser front thermostat THMO2 6 Disconnect the connector 6 7 Release the latch and take off the exit sensor 7 Fig 4 343 1 Remove the fuser roller cover P 4 123 4 10 4 Fuser roller cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the leaf spring 1 Fig 4 344 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser center thermostat 2 and fuser front thermostat 3 Fig 4 345 ...

Page 248: ...ge thermistor THMS3 1 Remove the front side cover P 4 123 4 10 2 Front side cover 2 Remove the rear side cover P 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 3 Remove the fuser roller cover P 4 123 4 10 4 Fuser roller cover 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the lamp holder 1 on the rear side Fig 4 346 5 Disconnect 3 connectors Fig 4 347 6 Release 2 latches and remove the connector bracket 2 Fig 4 348 ...

Page 249: ... 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 129 7 Disconnect 1 connector 3 and release the harness from the harness guide Fig 4 349 8 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 350 9 Release the harness from the harness guide and then remove the harness cover 4 Fig 4 351 ...

Page 250: ...served DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 130 10 Remove 3 screws and take off the center thermistor 5 side thermistor 6 and edge thermistor 7 with the bracket Fig 4 352 11 Remove 3 screws and take off the brackets from the center thermistor 5 side thermistor 6 and edge thermistor 7 Fig 4 353 ...

Page 251: ...e sure that the center thermistor 5 and side thermistor 6 are in contact with the fuser roller When installing make sure that the edge thermistor 7 is in contact with the fuser roller Fig 4 354 Fig 4 355 1 Remove the front side cover P 4 123 4 10 2 Front side cover 2 Remove the rear side cover P 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 3 Remove the fuser roller cover P 4 123 4 10 4 Fuser roller cover 4 Remove...

Page 252: ...ll rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 132 5 Release the harness 3 from the harness guide Remove 1 screw 4 and take off the lamp holder 5 on the front side Fig 4 357 6 Disconnect 3 connectors Fig 4 358 7 Release 2 latches and remove the connector bracket 6 Fig 4 359 ...

Page 253: ...508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 133 8 Remove 2 screws and remove the lamp holder 7 on the rear side Fig 4 360 9 Remove the heater lamp 8 by pulling it out toward the rear side Notes Do not touch the heater lamp with your bare hands Fig 4 361 ...

Page 254: ...eserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 134 4 10 11 Pressure roller 1 Remove the front side cover P 4 123 4 10 2 Front side cover 2 Remove the rear side cover P 4 123 4 10 3 Rear side cover 3 Remove 2 screws and take off the pressure roller cover 1 Fig 4 362 4 Remove 2 springs 2 Fig 4 363 ...

Page 255: ...elease lever 3 6 Remove the 2 levers 5 Fig 4 364 1 Remove the separation finger P 4 124 4 10 6 Separation finger 2 Remove the paper entrance guide P 4 124 4 10 5 Paper entrance guide 3 Remove the pressure roller P 4 134 4 10 11 Pressure roller 4 Remove the heater lamp P 4 131 4 10 10 Center heater lamp LAMP1 side heater lamp LAMP2 5 Remove 2 E rings and then take off the 2 pressure roller release ...

Page 256: ...15 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 136 6 Remove the C ring from the front side and then remove the gear 2 and collar 3 Fig 4 366 7 Remove the C ring from the rear side and then remove the collar 4 Fig 4 367 ...

Page 257: ... 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 137 8 Remove the bearing 5 Remove the fuser roller 6 by pulling it out toward the front side Notes Be sure not to damage the fuser roller When installing removing the C ring not to deform it by overextended Fig 4 368 ...

Page 258: ...5ppm 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 2 Remove the connecting port cover P 4 3 4 1 7 Connecting port cover 3 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 369 4 Disconnect 1 connector 1 and remove 2 screws Fig 4 370 5 Remove 1 screw Notes The screw on the front side is a shoulder screw When installing exercise care not to confuse it with other kinds of screws Fig 4 371 ...

Page 259: ...pm 45ppm 50ppm 6 Lift the rear side of the reverse unit 2 to release the hook 3 Slide the reverse unit 2 to the rear side and then remove it by pulling toward you Fig 4 372 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove the reverse unit P 4 138 4 11 1 Reverse unit 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 3 Remove 3 screws and take off the paper exit unit 1 Fig 4 373 ...

Page 260: ...xit unit 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 4 11 4 Lower exit roller 1 Remove the fuser unit P 4 121 4 10 1 Fuser unit 2 Remove 3 screws and take off the paper exit unit 1 Fig 4 374 1 Remove the paper exit unit P 4 139 4 11 2 Paper exit unit 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 1 E ring 1 1 gear 2 and 1 bushing 3 Fig 4 375 3 Remove 1 E ring 4 and 1 bushing 5 Fig 4 376 ...

Page 261: ...ASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 141 4 Remove the lower exit roller 6 Fig 4 377 5 Remove the idling roller 7 and 2 springs 8 Fig 4 378 Notes When replacing the the idling roller or idling roller shaft apply 0 5 x 2 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote EM 30L to each oil groove 9 and 10 Fig 4 379 9 10 ...

Page 262: ...the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 2 Remove the paper exit unit P 4 139 4 11 2 Paper exit unit 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 3 Remove the connecting port cover P 4 3 4 1 7 Connecting port cover 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the exit motor assembly 1 Fig 4 380 5 Disconnect 1 connector from the exit motor assembly 1 Fig 4 381 6 Remove the belt 2 Fig 4 382 ...

Page 263: ...N All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 143 7 Remove 2 screws and then take off the exit motor 4 by letting the gear 3 out of the large hole in the bracket Fig 4 383 Fig 4 384 ...

Page 264: ...m 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the reverse unit P 4 138 4 11 1 Reverse unit 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Disconnect the 1 connector 1 remove 3 screws and take off the reverse motor unit 2 Notes When installing exercise care not to forget to attach the timing belt 3 Fig 4 385 Fig 4 386 3 Disconnect the 1 connector 4 remove 2 screws and take off the reverse motor 5 Fig 4 387 ...

Page 265: ...ISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 145 4 11 7 Reverse gate solenoid SOL1 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 144 4 11 6 Reverse motor M13 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 388 3 Remove the harness from the harness guide 4 Remove the 1 spring 2 Fig 4 389 ...

Page 266: ...ing the plunger 3 with your hand remove the reverse gate solenoid 4 as shown in the figure on the right 6 Remove the plunger 3 Notes When installing insert the mold at the edge of the plunger into the groove of the reverse unit Fig 4 390 Fig 4 391 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 144 4 11 6 Reverse motor M13 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 392 ...

Page 267: ...8A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 147 3 Remove the 2 springs 2 applying pressure to the idling roller Fig 4 393 4 Remove the 1 gear 3 1 clip 4 1 bushing metal 5 and 1 bushing resin 6 then take off the upper exit roller 7 Fig 4 394 Fig 4 395 4 5 7 ...

Page 268: ...en replacing the the idling roller or idling roller shaft apply 0 5 x 2 rice sized grain of white grease Molykote EM 30L to each oil groove 8 and 9 Fig 4 396 1 Remove the reverse motor unit P 4 144 4 11 6 Reverse motor M13 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove the 1 gear 1 1 clip 2 1 bushing metal 3 and 1 bushing resin 5 then take off the reverse roller 4 Fig 4 397 Fig 4 398 8 9 2 5 4 ...

Page 269: ...4 4 1 9 Right front cover 2 Remove the right rear cover P 4 4 4 1 10 Right rear cover 3 Disconnect 3 connectors and take off 1 ground cable fixing screw 1 Release the harnesses from the harness clamps 2 Fig 4 399 4 Remove 1 screw And then take off the wire end bracket 3 by sliding it toward the direction of the arrow shown in the figure Fig 4 400 5 Raise the rear hinge 4 Notes When installing turn...

Page 270: ... 4 150 6 Slide the rear hinge 4 toward the rear side and pull it out from the automatic duplexing unit Fig 4 402 7 Slightly lift up the automatic duplexing unit 5 and then remove it by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 4 403 Notes When installing fit the boss 7 of automatic duplexing unit to the front hinge 6 Fig 4 404 ...

Page 271: ...BLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 151 4 12 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit P 4 149 4 12 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Release the harness 1 from the harness guide Fig 4 405 3 Remove 1 screw and take off the clutch cover 2 Fig 4 406 4 Remove 1 bushing 3 and 1 leaf spring 4 Fig 4 407 ...

Page 272: ...5ppm 50ppm 5 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the bypass feed clutch 5 Notes When installing the bypass feed clutch attach the stopper 6 to the projection Fig 4 408 Fig 4 409 1 Remove the transfer roller unit P 4 116 4 9 3 Transfer roller unit 2 Remove the bypass feed clutch P 4 151 4 12 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 3 Remove 1 ground cable fixing screw Fig 4 410 ...

Page 273: ...ORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 153 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the cover 1 Fig 4 411 5 Remove 6 screws and take off the ADU guide assembly 2 Fig 4 412 ...

Page 274: ...assembly 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 1 Remove the transfer unit P 4 114 4 9 1 Transfer unit 2 Remove the bypass feed clutch P 4 151 4 12 2 Bypass feed clutch CLT2 3 Remove the ADU middle cover P 4 157 4 12 6 ADU middle cover 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 4 Remove 1 ground cable fixing screw Fig 4 413 5 Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU guide assembly 1 Fig 4 414 ...

Page 275: ... 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 155 4 12 5 ADU middle cover 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 152 4 12 3 ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU upper cover 1 Fig 4 415 3 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 416 ...

Page 276: ...DIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 156 4 Release the harness 2 from the harness guide Fig 4 417 5 Remove 3 screws Fig 4 418 ...

Page 277: ...8A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 157 4 12 6 ADU middle cover 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 6 Release 2 latches and take off the ADU middle cover 3 Fig 4 419 1 Remove the automatic duplexing unit ADU P 4 149 4 12 1 Automatic duplexing unit ADU 2 Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU middle cover 1 Fig 4 420 ...

Page 278: ... 4 12 7 ADU control PC board ADU 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 152 4 12 3 ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 2 springs and take off the side cover release lever 1 Fig 4 421 3 Remove 1 ground cable fixing screw Fig 4 422 4 Disconnect 3 connectors and remove the ADU control PC board 2 Fig 4 423 ...

Page 279: ...35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 154 4 12 4 ADU guide assembly 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 2 Remove 1 ground cable fixing screw from the ADU guide assembly 1 Fig 4 424 3 Disconnect 3 connectors and take off the ADU control PC board 2 Fig 4 425 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 152 4 12 3 ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 2 springs and take off the side cover release lever ...

Page 280: ... CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 160 3 Remove 1 ground cable fixing screw 2 Remove 2 screws Fig 4 427 4 Disconnect 1 connector and take off the ADU motor assembly 3 Fig 4 428 5 Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU motor 4 Fig 4 429 ...

Page 281: ...MENT 4 161 4 12 10 ADU motor M5 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 154 4 12 4 ADU guide assembly 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 2 Remove 2 screws from the ADU guide assembly 1 Fig 4 430 3 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the ADU motor assembly 2 Fig 4 431 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU motor 3 Fig 4 432 ...

Page 282: ...he ADU guide assembly 1 3 Release the latch and remove the ADU entrance sensor 3 Fig 4 433 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm P 4 152 4 12 3 ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm P 4 154 4 12 4 ADU guide assembly 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 2 Disconnect 1 connector 2 from the ADU guide assembly 1 3 Release the latch and remove the ADU exit sensor 3 Fig 4 434 1 Remove the ADU ...

Page 283: ...08A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 163 3 Remove the collar 4 and then take off the transfer roller upper 5 Fig 4 436 4 Bend the rib 6 and remove the collar 7 Fig 4 437 5 Remove the collar 8 and then take off the transfer roller lower 9 Fig 4 438 ...

Page 284: ...r and the collar or performing machine refreshment apply an appropriate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L inside of the collars 11 When applying the grease make sure that the grease is not running over Grease might run out before the machine refreshment depending on frequency of use apply an appropriate amount of grease as necessary Fig 4 440 1 Remove the ADU middle cover P 4 155 4 12 5 ADU m...

Page 285: ...SW3 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 1 Remove the reverse unit P 4 138 4 11 1 Reverse unit 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Remove 2 screws and remove the ADU interlock switch cover 1 Fig 4 442 3 Disconnect 2 connectors 2 from the rear side of the ADU interlock switch cover 4 Release the latch and remove the ADU interlock switch 3 Fig 4 443 1 Open the side cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU interlock switch cover 1...

Page 286: ...tion cooling fan 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 3 Disconnect 2 connectors 2 from the rear side of the ADU interlock switch cover 4 Release the latch and remove the ADU interlock switch 3 Fig 4 445 1 Remove the ADU guide assembly P 4 152 4 12 3 ADU guide assembly 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm 2 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the fuser section cooling fan 1 Fig 4 446 ...

Page 287: ...g or removing options turn the main power switch off and disconnect the power cable from the outlet 4 13 1 MR 4000 Dual Scan Document Feeder 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Take off the connector cover Fig 4 447 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 448 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 449 ...

Page 288: ...EPLACEMENT 4 168 7 Remove 1 screw and take off the cover Fig 4 450 8 Remove 1 screw and take off the ground cable Disconnect 2 connectors 1 Damp heater harness JPD 2 Signal harness Fig 4 451 9 Remove 6 screws and take off the rear cover Fig 4 452 10 Remove 2 screws and take off the SYS board cover Fig 4 453 1 2 ...

Page 289: ...8A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 169 11 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 454 12 Remove 2 screws and take off the DSDF board Fig 4 455 13 Install the SYS board cover with 2 screws Fig 4 456 14 Install the rear cover with 6 screws Fig 4 457 ...

Page 290: ...d DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 170 15 Connect 2 connectors Install the ground cable with 1 screw 1 Damp heater harness JPD 2 Signal harness Fig 4 458 16 Install the cover with 1 screw Fig 4 459 17 Remove 4 screws and take off 2 brackets Fig 4 460 18 Remove 2 screws and 1 washer Fig 4 461 1 2 ...

Page 291: ...utomatic Document Feeder 19 Open the dual scan document feeder Remove 2 screws Fig 4 462 20 Remove the dual scan document feeder by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 4 463 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Take off the connector cover Fig 4 464 m ...

Page 292: ... 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 172 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 465 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 466 7 Remove 2 screws and take off 1 bracket Fig 4 467 ...

Page 293: ...ghts reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 173 8 Remove the cover Fig 4 468 9 Remove 2 screws and 1 washer Fig 4 469 10 Open the the reversing automatic document feeder Remove 2 screws Fig 4 470 ...

Page 294: ...1 Remove the reversing automatic document feeder by sliding it toward the rear side Fig 4 471 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the cover Fig 4 472 5 Remove 1 screw and take off the ground cable Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 473 ...

Page 295: ...ts reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 175 6 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side Fig 4 474 7 Install the cover with 1 screw Fig 4 475 8 Pull out the drawer Fig 4 476 ...

Page 296: ...HIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 176 9 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side Fig 4 477 10 Install the drawer Fig 4 478 11 Lift the equipment up and remove the paper feed pedestal Fig 4 479 ...

Page 297: ...ower button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove 1 screw and take off the cover Fig 4 480 5 Disconnect 2 connectors Remove 1 screw and take off the ground cable 1 Damp heater harness JPD 2 Signal harness Fig 4 481 6 Remove 3 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side Fig 4 482 2 1 ...

Page 298: ...508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 178 7 Install the cover with 1 screw Fig 4 483 8 Pull out the drawer Fig 4 484 9 Pull out the large capacity feeder drawer Fig 4 485 ...

Page 299: ...ghts reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 179 10 Install the right drawer Fig 4 486 11 Remove 4 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side Fig 4 487 12 Install the drawer Fig 4 488 ...

Page 300: ...3 Lift the equipment up and remove the large capacity feeder Fig 4 489 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connecting port cover 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 490 6 Remove 1 screw and take off the front cover of the bridge kit Fig 4 491 ...

Page 301: ... 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 181 7 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 492 8 Remove 2 screws and take off the fixing bracket Fig 4 493 9 Lift the bridge kit up to pull out the hook and pull the bridge kit toward the front side to remove it Fig 4 494 ...

Page 302: ...AND REPLACEMENT 4 182 4 13 6 MJ 1042 Inner Finisher 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 495 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 496 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 497 ...

Page 303: ...reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 183 7 Open the finisher cover Fig 4 498 8 Press the button to release the lock Pull out the finisher Fig 4 499 9 Remove 1 screw and take off 1 bracket Fig 4 500 ...

Page 304: ...A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 184 10 Install the finisher inside the equipment Fig 4 501 11 Remove 3 screws and take off the cover Fig 4 502 12 Remove 1 screw Fig 4 503 ...

Page 305: ... AND REPLACEMENT 4 185 4 13 7 MJ 1110 Saddle Stitch Finisher 13 Remove the finisher Fig 4 504 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 505 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 506 ...

Page 306: ...008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 186 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 507 7 Open the finisher cover and remove 1 fixing screw Pull out the lever Fig 4 508 8 Remove the finisher Fig 4 509 ...

Page 307: ... AND REPLACEMENT 4 187 4 13 8 MJ 1109 Finisher 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut down the machine 2 Turn the main power switch of the machine off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 510 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 511 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 512 ...

Page 308: ... 9 MJ 6105 with MJ 1110 Hole punch unit 7 Open the finisher cover and remove 1 fixing screw Pull out the lever Fig 4 513 8 Remove the finisher Fig 4 514 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 515 ...

Page 309: ...l rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 189 5 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 516 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 517 7 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 518 ...

Page 310: ...LY AND REPLACEMENT 4 190 8 Open the finisher cover and remove 1 fixing screw Pull out the lever Fig 4 519 9 Take off the finisher with the hole punch unit Notes Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving only the finisher unit Fig 4 520 10 Remove 2 screws and take off the connector cover Fig 4 521 ...

Page 311: ...reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 191 11 Release the harness from 9 harness clamps Fig 4 522 12 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 523 13 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 524 ...

Page 312: ...3 10 MJ 6105 with MJ 1109 Hole punch unit 14 Remove 2 screws Lift up the hole punch unit and take it off Fig 4 525 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the connector cover Fig 4 526 5 Disconnect the connector Fig 4 527 ...

Page 313: ...DIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 193 6 Install the connector cover Fig 4 528 7 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 529 8 Open the finisher cover and remove 1 fixing screw Pull out the lever Fig 4 530 ...

Page 314: ...ghts reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 194 9 Take off the finisher with the hole punch unit Notes Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving only the finisher unit Fig 4 531 10 Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover Fig 4 532 11 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 533 ...

Page 315: ...008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 195 12 Install the connector cover with 1 screw Fig 4 534 13 Take off the cover of the hole punch unit lower side Fig 4 535 14 Remove 2 screws Lift up the hole punch unit and take it off Fig 4 536 ...

Page 316: ...11 MJ 5014 Job Separator 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the tray Fig 4 537 5 Open the side cover Remove 1 screw and take off the connecting port cover Fig 4 538 6 Disconnect 2 connectors Fig 4 539 ...

Page 317: ...45ppm 50ppm 7 Loosen 2 screws and take off the front cover of MJ 5014 Fig 4 540 8 Remove 1 screw Lift up the job separator and release the hook Take off the job separator toward the front Fig 4 541 1 Press the Power button on the control panel to shut it down 2 Turn the main power switch of the equipment off 3 Disconnect the power cable 4 Remove the tray Fig 4 542 ...

Page 318: ...HIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT 4 198 5 Open the side cover Remove 1 screw and take off the connecting port cover Fig 4 543 6 Disconnect 1 connector Fig 4 544 7 Remove 2 screws and take off the job separator Fig 4 545 ...

Page 319: ...various lists or outputs them in a CSV format 31 CHART PRINT MODE Prints the charts FAX 11 FAX CLEAR MODE Sets the fax board 12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE Outputs the contents set for the fax functions 13 FAX FUNCTION MODE Sets the fax functions 19 RAM EDIT MODE This is the mode for the special settings This is not used generally Mode Contents 01 Control panel check mode Checks various contents regarding...

Page 320: ...ress OK 03 TEST MODE 5 4 04 TEST PRINT MODE 5 5 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE CLASSIC 2 5 6 08 SETTING MODE CLASSIC 2 5 8 20 PM SUPPORT MODE 5 9 30 LIST PRINT MODE 5 10 31 CHART PRINT MODE 5 11 FAX 11 FAX CLEAR MODE 12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE 13 FAX FUNCTION MODE 19 RAM EDIT MODE 3 5 12 HS Menu HOME START POWER ON Enter a service password and press OK 01 Control panel check mode 5 13 49 Firmware update mode 11 2...

Page 321: ...ars press it When neither Return nor FS Menu are not displayed on the screen Press the ON OFF button for a few seconds to shut down the equipment To cancel the modes which can be entered from HS Menu and the HA modes press the ON OFF button for a few seconds to shut down the equipment C State transition diagram of self diagnosis modes Fig 5 1 Be sure to cancel the self diagnostic mode before custo...

Page 322: ...ltaneously HS HS Menu Starting by pressing the ON OFF button while pushing the HOME and START buttons simultaneously 2 Symbol for the mode The first two digits of each mode 3 Code The number of the code 4 Sub code This will only be given when a sub code exists A FS Menu 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE or 08 SETTING MODE FS 05 1234 56 or Performs FS 05 1234 56 is taken for explanation purposes 1 Start FS Menu b...

Page 323: ...ART button 03 TEST MODE The key pressing procedure for the modes which are set by the combination of the F1 F2 and F3 keys are described as below F1 ON Only F1 is turned ON F1 2 ON F1 and F2 are turned ON The number of the F key which is turned ON is depicted by dividing with commas as above F1 2 3 ON All of the F keys are turned ON F OFF All of the F keys are turned OFF Example FS 03 F OFF 9 A Tu...

Page 324: ...he icon to operate 3 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen C HA mode 1 Start HA mode by pressing the ON OFF button while pushing the HOME and ACCESS buttons simultaneously 2 Enter the password to start and press OK 3 Follow the instructions displayed on the screen D When a particular setting condition is applied The setting value is given at the end of the description by dividing with co...

Page 325: ... For the codes available with the Service UI refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document 5 3 2 Operation procedure 1 Start the FS Menu Select the mode of the above Service UI and press NEXT 2 Select the item whose setting is to be changed and press NEXT until the code number is displayed Press OK The operation of the selected code starts 5 3 3 Starting the FS Menu from the normal mode...

Page 326: ...de the authentication screen is always displayed Notes The password needs to be changed to log in for the first time In case both the service password and administrator password are forgotten the passwords can be reset in the password reset mode In case both the service password and the administrator password have been forgotten they can be reset by means of the HA mode Note that the user data are...

Page 327: ...med before the equipment enters the test mode The PRINT DATA lamp blinks when the input check is running 100 is displayed on the 03 test mode start screen C is displayed when F1 is turned ON S is displayed when F2 is turned ON F is displayed when F3 is turned ON Fig 5 7 Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when A th...

Page 328: ...2 modem test or CML test press F1 to switch the line mode By pressing F1 the line mode is switched between line1 and line 2 Return to the standby screen for code input by pressing Clear Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the codes available in the test mode 03 03 FS POWER OFF ON Exit START Code Operation ON Stop code Operation OFF START 03 1 FS POWER OFF ON Exit R A E L C...

Page 329: ...error occurs it is indicated on the panel but the recovery operation is not performed Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error During test printing the CLEAR button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the codes available in the 04 TEST PRINT MODE 04 FS POWER OFF ON Exit Code Media selection START CLEAR Operation...

Page 330: ... Procedure 2 Procedure 3 Procedure 4 Press FUNCTION CLAER to enter minus START Test copy 05 FS POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR Key in a value CLEAR Corrects value OK Stores value in RAM 05 FS START Test copy POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START OK Value unchangeable Value displayed 05 FS START Test copy POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL ...

Page 331: ...nt mode In that case turn the power ON normally and leave the equipment for approx 3 minutes and then restart the adjustment mode Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the codes available in the 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE 05 FS START Test cop POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL or CLEAR Automatic adjustment 05 FS START Test copy POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital...

Page 332: ...5 6 2 TEST PRINT Operation procedure One sheet of the test print for various patterns can be printed out by entering 1 to 3 digit code and pressing Print in the CLASSIC Mode standby screen in the 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the codes and the patterns of the test print ...

Page 333: ...alue in RAM POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR OK Sets or changes value CLEAR Corrects value CANCEL 08 FS POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START OK Adjustment value cannot be changed 08 FS POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code START CANCEL Automatic setting INITIALIZE 08 FS POWER OFF ON Exit Digital key Code Digital key Sub code Digital key FUNCTION CLEAR Sets or ch...

Page 334: ...he codes available in the 08 SETTING MODE 08 FS Digital key Code Digital key START CANCEL OK CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM Sets or changes value POWER OFF ON Exit 08 FS Digital key Code Select icon START CANCEL OK CLEAR Corrects value Stores value in RAM POWER OFF ON Exit 08 FS Digital key Code Digital key or Software keyboard START CANCEL CLEAR Corrects value 2 Stores value in RAM 1 PA...

Page 335: ...ufacture Purpose Only 214 Total counter list 221 05 adjustment value difference 222 08 setting value difference 223 Job log Message log 300 ALL CSV files Digital keys Key in the first code to be printed Digital keys Key in the last code to be printed POWER OFF ON Exit Connect USB Disconnect USB START List starts to be printed START START 224 FAX function code 13 data list 30 FS Code 101 Adjustment...

Page 336: ...e USB storage procedure above lists are stored in a CSV format The names of the CSV files are shown below 201 ADJUSTMENT_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 202 SETTING_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 203 PM_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 204 PIXEL_TONER_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 205 PIXEL_SERVICE_LIST_serial_date and time YYYYMMDDHHMMSS csv 2...

Page 337: ...are not output Lists List code Printout CSV file output Adjustment mode 05 data list 101 201 Setting mode 08 data list 102 202 PM support mode data list 103 203 Pixel counter list toner cartridge reference 104 204 Pixel counter list service call reference 105 205 Error history list 106 Maximum 1000 items 206 Maximum 1000 items Error history list 107 Latest 80 items Firmware upgrade log 108 Maximum...

Page 338: ... 5 20 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE Fig 5 8 The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list 05 ADJUSTMENT MODE DATA LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA 2000 128 3860 88 4830 128 5920 128 S N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 ...

Page 339: ...OSTIC MODE 5 21 08 SETTING MODE Fig 5 9 The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list 08 SETTING MODE DATA LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA 2010 2 2880 12 3040 0 3070 0 S N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 ...

Page 340: ...t for PM PM DRIVE COUNTS are output together with PM units Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM See the following page for PM P 7 1 7 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM PM SUPPORT CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx UNIT OUTPUT PAGES PMOUTPUT PAGE DRIVE COUNTS PMDRIVE COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS DRUM 2516 70000 11735 170000 DRUMBLADE 2516 70000 11735 170000 GRID 2516 70000 11...

Page 341: ... cartridge reference are output in a list See the following page for the pixel counter P 5 55 5 18 Pixel counter PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx TONERCARTRIDGE NO DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOTAL 0 20xx xx xx Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 1 20xx xx xx Average Pixel Count 2 70 1 74 2 51 2 20xx xx xx Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 S N xxxxxxxxx FINS N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 999999...

Page 342: ...ervice call reference are output in a list See the following page for the pixel counter P 5 55 5 18 Pixel counter PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx SERVICEMAN NO DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOTAL 0 20xx xx xx Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 1 20xx xx xx Average Pixel Count 2 70 1 74 2 51 2 20xx xx xx Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 S N xxxxxxxxx FINS N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 D...

Page 343: ...110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 F110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 F110 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 EAD0 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 E860 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000_0000_0_0000000000 E731 00000000 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 000 000 0000_0000...

Page 344: ...nter counter data black when firmware was updated PRINT 2 Printer counter data twin color when firmware was updated PRINT C Printer counter data full color when firmware was updated LIST List print counter data when firmware was updated FAX Fax print counter data when firmware was updated STATUS Result of update FW UPGRADE LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx MANUFACTUREDATE 20xx xx xx UNPACKINGDATE 20xx xx xx US...

Page 345: ...ction TOTAL Total counter data when the power was turned OFF and then back ON POWER ON_OFF LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx DATE TIME FUNCTION TOTAL xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx ON 99999999 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx OFF 99999999 xxx...

Page 346: ...TER ROM VERSION xxxM xxx SCANNER ROM VERSION xxxS xxx PFC ROM VERSION xxxF xxx RADF ROM VERSION DF xxx FINISHER STACKER ROM VERSION FIN FINISHER SADDLE ROM VERSION SDL FINISHER PUNCH ROM VERSION PUN FAX BOARD FIRMWARE ROM VERSION Fxx xxx SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL OS VERSION Vx xxx x x HDD DATA VERSION Txxxxxxxxxxx SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS VERSION Txxxxxxxxxxx LANGUAGE VERSION English US xxx xxx xxx xxx x...

Page 347: ... of engine firmware is output ENGINE FW LOG 20xx xx xx xx xx TOSHIBA e STUDIOxxxx Cxxxxxxxx FIN S N xxxxxxxx TOTAL 9999999 DF TOTAL 9999999 CODE SUB DATA 4624 0 0 4624 1 0 4624 2 58 4624 3 3 4624 4 58 4624 5 3 4624 6 0 4624 7 56 4624 8 3 4624 9 0 4624 10 41 4624 11 1 4624 12 29 4624 13 7 4624 14 0 4624 15 0 4624 16 0 4624 17 0 4624 18 0 4624 19 0 4624 20 0 ...

Page 348: ...Ae STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 NETWORK COPY FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL SMALL LARGE TOTAL FAX FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL SMALL LARGE TOTAL NETWORK FULL COLOR BLACK TOTAL SMALL LARGE TOTAL FINS N xxxxxxxxx FAX xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx...

Page 349: ...even if the system firmware is upgraded However the file will be deleted when the HDD is formatted or replaced When the easy set up mode is restarted while a specified value such as 4 through 8 is set for FS 08 9022 Production process management status for easy setup the back up file stored during unpacking and setting up is deleted after the completion of the automatic gamma adjustment and a new ...

Page 350: ...TION MODE 19 RAM EDIT MODE Notes The data automatically received during the self diagnostic mode are sometimes not printed Therefore be sure to disconnect the modular code form the line connector LINE1 LINE2 of the equipment before starting the self diagnostic mode After the equipment is released from the self diagnostic mode reconnect the modular code 5 11 1 11 FAX CLEAR MODE 1 Select FAX in the ...

Page 351: ...C CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 33 A FAX Set up The destination of the fax can be set 1 Press SETUP FAX 2 Select the destination and press OK Fig 5 21 ...

Page 352: ...agement area F code box information System setting area NVRAM Settings in the 13 FAX FUNCTION MODE Areas 100 999 Operation procedure 1 Press CUSTOM INITIALZE Fig 5 22 2 Select the mode INIT MEMORY Initializes the user registration area SRAM so that there are no data stored Initializes the system setting area NVRAM so that its value is reset to the default setting CLEAR DATA Initializes the image d...

Page 353: ...lect 12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE and press NEXT Fig 5 23 2 Select the list and press PRINT The names of the lists in 12 FAX LIST PRINT MODE are shown below Protocol trace list Line1 Protocol trace list Line2 Error count list transmis recept Line 1 Error count list transmis recept Line 2 ERROR COUNT LIST IFAX ERROR COUNT LIST SCAN Function List for Maintenance Memory dump list system Memory dump list FA...

Page 354: ...Confirmation procedure Refer to the Self diagnostic code list separate document for the codes available in the 13 FAX FUNCTION MODE 5 11 4 19 RAM EDIT MODE This is a mode for the special adjustments and settings This is not used generally FAX 13 FS Digital key Code START OK Adjustment value cannot be changed POWER OFF ON Exit FAX 13 FS Digital key Code Digital key CLEAR Corrects value START CANCEL...

Page 355: ...nel check mode the LCD back light blinks in 3 second intervals Moreover all LEDs are lit Tips By touching the screen or pressing a certain hard key the screen is shifted to the hard key confirmation screen It is not possible to return to the HS Menu from 01 Control panel check mode Therefore be sure to shut down the equipment by pressing the ON OFF button for a few seconds in the screen after the ...

Page 356: ...ed The following table shows each text and performance when the key is pressed The text is displayed only while the key is being pressed Each LED is turned OFF only while the key is being pressed Hard key Text Performance ON OFF Pressing for at least 0 5 seconds MAIN POWER The MEMORY RX LED is turned OFF ENERGY SAVER ENARGY SAVER The ENERGY SAVER LED is turned OFF ACCESS ACCESS The PRINT DATA LED ...

Page 357: ...h out enlargement and pinch in reduction are correctly detected on the screen When the above operation is performed on the screen an arrow which indicates the one detected by the touch sensor and a message are displayed Moreover when any of LH LL RH or RL located on each corner of the screen is pressed the calibration condition of the touched position can be checked B Checking of the USB storage d...

Page 358: ... are below 5 13 2 Operation procedure 1 Perform HS 73 by pressing the 73 Assist mode icon The following screen is displayed Fig 5 25 2 Press the icon to operate Functions Content Clear Error Flag in Software Installation Clearing update error flag Format Root Partition Formatting data storage partition Format HDD Creating HDD partition Clear SRAM Formatting SRAM data Key Backup Restore Backing up ...

Page 359: ...DD data must be installed after performing this function C Creating HDD partition Format HDD When the HDD is replaced or UI data etc are downloaded using the USB storage it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading In this case the partition is created in the HDD with this function Notes When downloading with a download jig it is not necessary to format a partition in advanc...

Page 360: ...se in SRAM when the icon is pressed When KeyBroken or KeyNull is displayed on the FROM row Recovers the encryption Key or License in SRAM when the icon is pressed F Erasing HDD securely Erase HDD Securely This function is used when installing Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 or before discarding the HDD It overwrites all the used areas on the HDD with the selected data and makes it unusable After se...

Page 361: ... one Notes When this operation has been done do not perform SRAM data formatting Clear SRAM before the normal start up G Erasing SRAM securely Erase SRAM Securely This function is used before discarding the SRAM board for the SYS board It overwrites all the used areas on the SRAM board with the selected data and makes it unusable Immediately after selecting this function the processing starts and ...

Page 362: ...isposes of ADI HDD data safely without any of leakage Deletes image data when reusing a used ADI HDD 5 14 2 Operation procedure 1 Perform HS 74 by pressing the 74 HDD Assist mode icon Then the type of the mounted HDD is checked and either of the following screens is displayed When the security HDD is mounted Fig 5 28 When a normal HDD is mounted Fig 5 29 HDD Assist Mode 4C System Firmware Version ...

Page 363: ...ions A Revert factory initial status HDD Select this to dispose of the ADI HDD as well as the equipment When this item is selected all data in the HDD are deleted and the HDD is reverted to its initial status at the factory shipment The following screen is displayed when the Revert Factory Initial Status HDD icon is pressed Fig 5 30 Press OK to carry out the operation When the operation is finishe...

Page 364: ...minutes since the partition must be rebuilt The following screen is displayed when the Remove Key icon is pressed Fig 5 31 Press OK to carry out the operation When the operation is finished the result appears on the menu Notes After this operation the equipment becomes reusable without reinstalling the firmware HDD Assist Mode 4C System Firmware Version XXXXXX Current HDD Type Select Menu Cancel R...

Page 365: ...Fig 5 32 2 Press the icon to operate Notes Do not turn the power OFF with the MAIN POWER button after the processing has started while the processing is being performed After the processing is completed a beep sounds 4 times and either Completed or Failed appears on the screen Remarks When the mode is started 1 Check F S is selected by default Content Functions Check F S Checks the file system Rec...

Page 366: ...ch partition shown above Notes More than one partition can be selected is displayed on the left of the selected number If damage is discovered recover or initialize the file system HDD B Recovery of the File System Recovery F S In case that an error occurs during the file system check each partition can be recovered Fig 5 34 File System F S Recovery Mode Check F S Please Select Partition 0 Main me...

Page 367: ... creates an initial file 5 Initializes a partition imagedata and creates an initial file 6 Initializes a partition storage and creates an initial file 7 Initializes a partition encryption and creates an initial file 8 Initializes a partition TAT and creates an initial file Notes More than one partition can be selected is displayed on the left of the selected number Notes If 1 Except or 7 encryptio...

Page 368: ...can be displayed Data equivalent to the setting contents of 08 9065 are displayed When this item is selected data in the HDD embedded in the equipment are displayed is displayed for the items not supported Fig 5 37 Notes NAV Normalized Attribute Value Indicates the value of the specified HDD condition as compared to the manufacturer s optimum value Worst Worst Ever Normalized Attribute Value Indic...

Page 369: ...ition is not displayed as it is encrypted G Initialization of log file HDD Utility Log files for researching can be deleted Since only a certain amount of log files for researching is usually stored in the work area of an HDD the use of this mode is not necessary In case the performance level of the equipment is lowered e g the response of the control panel becomes extremely slow make use of this ...

Page 370: ...ons of 76 SRAM clear mode Sets the serial number of this equipment Clears SRAM data when HS 73 cannot be used Clears F800 error Clears F900 error 5 16 2 Operation procedure 1 Perform HS 76 by pressing the 76 SRAM Clear Mode icon Then the following screen is displayed Fig 5 39 2 Press the icon to operate Notes The key board screen is displayed when pressing the icon Key in the serial number of this...

Page 371: ...to clear all SRAM data when replacing SYS SRAM Replace the SRAM board and then clear the SRAM data After clearing the SRAM data initialize SRAM following its replacement procedure Refer to P 9 25 9 2 8 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM Notes When this operation has been done do not perform HDD partition creation Format HDD before the normal start up C 2 Reset Date and Time Select t...

Page 372: ...ed at the same time When the SRAM is initialized with wrong destination at the replacement of the SRAM board After updating with a download jig and performing Clear SRAM select this item After selecting this initialize SRAM following its replacement procedure Refer to P 9 25 9 2 8 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM 5 17 Password Reset Mode The administrator password and the service ...

Page 373: ...py print mode and environment each user has different tendency and as a result the number of output pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows Original Data coverage Original Data density Original Print mode Density setting Print Pattern Character images e g Text consume more toner than solid images even though they may ...

Page 374: ...judged when the total number of pixel count or output pages after the detection of toner cartridge empty has exceeded the threshold The threshold to be used is selectable in the FS 08 6506 between the pixel count and output pages 0 Output pages 1 Pixel counter The threshold of pixel count is set in the FS 08 6508 and that of output pages is set in the FS 08 6507 When the new toner cartridge is jud...

Page 375: ...mitting pixels of the laser to all pixels on standard paper The examples of pixel count are as follows Notes In the following examples solid copy is considered to be 100 But since the image has 4 margins it never becomes 100 actually Ex Printing 5 pages on A4 LT size with solid copy laser emit to all pixels Pixel count 100 Print count 5 Printing 5 pages on A4 LT size with blank copy laser never em...

Page 376: ...08 6504 Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen toner cartridge reference or service technician reference is selected FS 08 6505 Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected After the toner empty is detected by the auto toner sensor this counter chec...

Page 377: ...ut pages per cartridge is as follows Fig 5 42 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge 5 Pixel counter confirmation Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected 0 Displayed 1 Not displayed in the setting mode 08 6504 and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected 0 Service ...

Page 378: ...ghts reserved SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 60 When TONER CARTRIDGE is pressed the following screen appears Fig 5 43 Information screen of toner cartridge reference When SERVICE is pressed the following screen appears Fig 5 44 Information screen of service technician reference full color ...

Page 379: ...ian reference PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx TONERCARTRIDGE NO DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOTAL 0 20xx xx xx Print Count LT A4 181 45 226 1 20xx xx xx Average Pixel Count 2 70 1 74 2 51 2 20xx xx xx Latest Pixel Count 6 15 0 39 0 39 S N xxxxxxxxx FINS N xxxxxxxxx TOSHIBAe STUDIOxxx TOTAL 9999999 DFTOTAL 9999999 PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 20xx xx xx xx xx SERVICEMAN NO DATE COLOR PPC PRN FAX TOT...

Page 380: ...ormed is stored Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed The date 08 6503 was performed is stored Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference Copier function Print count page 6563 6558 Average pixel count 6623 6602 Latest pixel count 6724 6616 Printer function Print count page 6565 6560 Average pixel count 6629 6603 Latest pixel coun...

Page 381: ...05 08 13 Notes The codes only displaying the values and the ones acquiring or clearing the values by automatic execution are not included When a value of the code which exchanges another one sequentially is changed another one is altered in conjunction with it Setting of the codes FS 08 8911 and FS 08 9000 is not possible 5 19 3 Setting files 1 Setting files An encrypted file in which the setting ...

Page 382: ...storage device after this code is performed File name DIG_ RESULT_XXXX_yymmddhhmmss xml XXXX Serial No File format xml format 2 Example Policy Data Category 05 Category 08 Code MainCode 3807 MainCode RESULT SUCCESS RESULT Code Code MainCode 9240 MainCode RESULT FAILED RESULT Code Code MainCode 9264 MainCode SubCode 1 SubCode RESULT UNSPECIFIED RESULT Code Category 08 Category 13 Data Policy SUCCES...

Page 383: ...rocedure 1 Enter into the Classic mode with FS 08 2 Install a USB storage device in which setting files are stored in the root in the MFP 3 Key in 3673 and then press the START button 4 Press EXECUTION 5 Setting for all codes included in the setting file are completed the BASIC screen of the 08 mode appears 6 Remove the USB storage device ...

Page 384: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SELF DIAGNOSTIC MODE 5 66 ...

Page 385: ...alignment at the registration roller Items 6 3 4 Scanner related adjustment 6 3 3 Printer related adjustment Order B Primary scanning data laser writing start position C Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction A Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction D Secondary scanning data laser writing start position E Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing A B C D...

Page 386: ...s the Up or Down button to change the value B indicates the output voltage of the auto toner sensor 2 30 V in the above case The drum developer unit etc are in operation C indicates the latest adjustment value 3 After about two minutes the value B automatically starts changing Fig 6 3 4 After a short time the value B becomes stable and the display changes as follows Fig 6 4 5 Check if the value B ...

Page 387: ...e Up or Down button to adjust the value manually Notes The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows 7 Press the OK button The drum developer unit etc are stopped and the following is displayed Fig 6 5 8 Turn the power OFF 9 Install the toner cartridge Button to be pressed Value A Value B Up Increased Increased Down Decreased Decreased OK 100 TEST MODE A3 A ...

Page 388: ... a Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed 4001 b Primary scanning data laser writing start position 4006 c Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed 4009 d Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 4058 4059 4060 4061 4062 4063 e Primary scanning data laser writing start pos...

Page 389: ...ided test copying can be performed normal copy mode Fig 6 6 100 A A3 TEST MODE 100 A A3 TEST MODE 100 A A3 Wait Warming Up 100 A A3 COPYING 100 XXX A3 TEST MODE YYY ZZZ Current adjustment value Adjustment value newly keyed in If no entering YYY is displayed Code No 1 POWER OK Digital keys START Key in codes Operation keys Display Power OFF ON Exit the Adjustment Mode Test copy Digital keys TEST CO...

Page 390: ...er drawer PFPlower drawer LCF ADU Bypass feed Plain paper 64 80 g m2 17 20 lb Bond 4100 1 4101 1 4108 1 4109 1 4111 4110 1 4103 1 Thick paper 1 81 105g m2 21 28 lb Bond 4115 1 4116 1 4117 1 4118 1 4119 4120 1 4104 1 Thick paper 2 106 163g m2 29 lb Bond 90 lb Index 4115 4 4105 1 Thick paper 3 164 209g m2 91 110 lb Index 4106 2 OHP 4107 3 1 1 Single sided grid pattern 3 Double sided grid pattern 2 C...

Page 391: ...tion In this case it is advisable to change or reduce the aligning amount However if the aligning amount is reduced too much this may cause the shift of leading edge position So when adjusting the aligning amount try to choose the appropriate amount while confirming the leading edge position is not shifted As a tentative countermeasure the service life of the feed roller can be extended by increas...

Page 392: ...eproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed Printer B 52 0 5mm P 6 9 B Primary scanning data laser writing start position Printer C 200 0 5mm P 6 10 C Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed Copier Printer D 52 0 5mm P 6 11 D Secondary scanning data laser writing start position E 52 0 5mm ...

Page 393: ...approx 0 15 mm step B Primary scanning data laser writing start position Printer Procedure 1 Performs FS 05 05 Adjustment Mode 2 Press 1 TEST PRINT A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out Use A3 LD from the lower drawer Refer to 3 Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern 4 Check if t...

Page 394: ...e grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 10th line at the leading edge of the paper to the 30th line of the grid pattern Normally the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed 4 Check if the distance C is within 200 0 5 mm 5 If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again FS 05 Key in code 4526 START Key in a value acce...

Page 395: ...aper to the 6th line of the grid pattern Normally the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed At the duplexing measure it on the top side of the grid pattern 4 Check if the distance D is within 52 0 5 mm 5 If not use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again FS 05 Key in the code shown above START Key in an acceptable value shown above OK Stored in memory 100 A ...

Page 396: ...in code 4019 START 0 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 OK Stored in memory 100 A is displayed Press 3 TEST PRINT A grid pattern is printed out The larger the adjustment value is the longer the distance E becomes approx 0 0423 mm step E 2 Adjustment for short sized paper Procedure 1 Performs FS 05 05 Adjustment Mode 2 Press 3 TEST PRINT A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out...

Page 397: ...01 Lower drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 15 mm step B FS 05 4006 Lower drawer A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 0423 mm step Key in the same value for FS 05 4005 C FS 05 4526 Lower drawer A3 LD 200 0 5 mm 0 25 mm step D FS 05 4058 Lower drawer A3 LD 4059 Lower drawer A4 LT 4060 PFP A4 LT 4063 LCF A4 LT 4061 Bypass feed A4 LT 4062 Duplexing A3 LD 52 0 5 mm 0 1 mm step E FS 05 4019 0 Lower drawer A3 LD 4019 1 Lower drawe...

Page 398: ...he power ON 2 Press TEST COPY START to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3 LD paper 3 Key in 3033 and press the START button to move the carriage to the adjustment position 4 Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2 Step 1 In case of A Tighten the mirror 3 adjustment screw Rear 1 CW In case of B Loosen the mirror 3 adjustment screw Rear 1 CCW Fig 6 10 Feeding direction Feeding directi...

Page 399: ...ETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 15 5 Apply the screw locking agents to the adjustment screws 2 areas Recommended screw lock agent Manufacturer Three Bond Product name 1401E Step 2 In case of C Tighten the mirror 1 adjustment screw Rear 1 CW In case of D Loosen the mirror 1 adjustment screw Rear 1 CCW Fig 6 11 ...

Page 400: ...0 and the lower drawer refer to 4 Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance A is within the range of 260 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 4000 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the OK button stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger...

Page 401: ...A3 LD 100 and the lower drawer Refer to 4 Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance B is within the range of 10 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 3030 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the OK button stored in memory 10...

Page 402: ...mode of A3 LD 100 and the lower drawer Refer to 4 Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance C is within the range of 200 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 3032 START Key in a value acceptable values 63 to 193 Press the OK button stored in memory 100 A is displa...

Page 403: ...3 LD 100 and the lower drawer Refer to 4 Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler 5 Check if the distance D is within the range of 10 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 3031 START Key in a value acceptable values 90 to 166 Press the OK button stored in memory...

Page 404: ...he lower drawer Refer to 4 Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area E is within the range of 4 2 0 5 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 4050 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the OK button stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment v...

Page 405: ...wer drawer Refer to 4 Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area F is within the range of 4 2 1 0 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 4052 START Key in a value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the OK button stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment value is...

Page 406: ...drawer Refer to 4 Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image 5 Check if the blank area G is within the range of 4 2 1 0 mm 6 If not use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3 to 5 above FS 05 Key in the code 4053 START Key in value acceptable values 0 to 255 Press the OK button stored in memory 100 A is displayed The larger the adjustment value is th...

Page 407: ...Key in 10 and press the TEST PRINT button to print a Patch chart for gamma adjustment 3 Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step 2 face down on the original glass Place the chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale 4 Key in a code and press the START button 5 If the adjustment is finished properly press OK to have its results reflected To cancel ...

Page 408: ... 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct the keyed in value press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Press the TEST COPY button and then the START button Then perform test copying 6 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 1 to 5 Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text User Custom 7114...

Page 409: ... with the current settings if necessary make adjustment using the following procedure 05 Adjustment Mode Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings if necessary make adjustment using the following procedure Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 6 24 6 4 2 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Photo Text User Custom 7100 7102 7101 ...

Page 410: ...as that of P 6 24 6 4 2 Density adjustment 6 4 6 Adjustment of smudged text in black The smudged faint text can be set at the following codes 05 Adjustment Mode Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 6 24 6 4 2 Density adjustment Original mode Item to be adjusted Remarks Text Photo Text User Custom 7286 7287 7237 Manual density mode 0 Background peak fixed 1 Background peak varied Original mode ...

Page 411: ...press the START button 3 Key in a number for the density area to be adjusted 0 1 or 2 and then press the START button 0 Low density 1 Medium density 2 High density 4 Key in an adjustment value To correct the keyed in value press the CLEAR button 5 Press the OK button to store the value in memory The equipment goes back to the ready state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Press the TES...

Page 412: ...Y button and then select an original mode Then press the START button to perform test copying 8 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Code Item to be adjusted Remarks Text photo Text Photo 7218 0 to 4 7219 0 to 4 7220 0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased text becomes lighter Acceptable values 0 to 10 Notes 1 Set not to reverse the large and...

Page 413: ...whether the original set is blank or not This adjustment is made when OMIT BLANK PAGE is selected on the control panel The adjustment value is simultaneously applied to all modes at PPC and scanning 05 Adjustment Mode Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 24 6 4 2 Density adjustment Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 7025 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF black and white The sma...

Page 414: ... in a code and press the START button 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct the keyed in value press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job 6 If the desired text density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 5 Language Remarks PS PCL XPS 7325 7326 7327 When a larger value ...

Page 415: ... 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job 8 If the desired image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Normal Print Toner mode Hardcopy security printing Item to be adjusted Remarks Toner save PS Toner save PCL Toner save XPS 7350 0 to 4 7351 0 to 4 7352 0 to 4 7353 0 to 4 7354 0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased text becomes lighte...

Page 416: ...dy state 6 For resetting the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF and then back ON Then perform printing 8 If the image density has not been attained repeat step 2 to 7 Color mode Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Item to be adjusted Item to be adjusted Remarks PS PS PCL PCL XPS XPS Black 600dpi 7315 0 7316 0 7317 0 7318 0 7319 0 7320 0 Low density The larger the value is the dens...

Page 417: ...desired original mode and press the START button 3 Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted 0 1 or 2 and press the START button 0 Low density L 1 Medium density M 2 High density H 4 Key in the adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 5 Press the OK button to store the value in memory The equipment goes back to the ready state 6 For resetti...

Page 418: ... the glass is black or color Namely this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto Color is selected at color modes 05 Adjustment Mode Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 34 6 6 2 Density adjustment Color Item to be adjusted Remarks Original mode Text Photo Text Photo User custom 8339 8340 8341 8380 Manual density center value The larger the value is the darker the image become...

Page 419: ... Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 34 6 6 2 Density adjustment Code Color mode Original mode Contents 8335 Full Color Text The larger the value is the sharper the image becomes while the smaller the value is the softer the image becomes The smaller the value is the less moire tends to appear The acceptable values are 0 to 255 Default 128 8336 Photo 8354 Text Photo 8375 User custom...

Page 420: ...as that of P 6 34 6 6 2 Density adjustment 6 6 8 Adjustment of saturation The saturation of the scanned image is adjusted for color scanning 05 Adjustment Mode Procedure The procedure is the same as that of P 6 34 6 6 2 Density adjustment Code Original mode Remarks 8314 Text Photo The larger the value is the black side of the image becomes darker Acceptable values 0 to 4 Default Text Photo 1 Other...

Page 421: ...it 6 If the desired image quality has not been attained repeat step 1 to 5 RADF Item to be adjusted Remarks 7025 Background density processing RADF scanning Black and white Adjusts the density of background for RADF scanning The smaller the adjustment value is the lighter the background becomes The larger the adjustment value is the darker the background becomes Acceptable values 0 to 255 Default ...

Page 422: ...24 6 4 2 Density adjustment 6 6 12 JPEG compression level adjustment The compression level for saving the scanned data in the JPEG format can be adjusted as follows 05 Adjustment Mode Procedure Procedure is same as that of P 6 34 6 6 2 Density adjustment Code Item to be adjusted Remark 7489 Surrounding void amount adjustment When the value increases the blank area around the scanned image becomes ...

Page 423: ...ction When the value decreases the effect of reducing streaks becomes larger When the value increases the effect of reducing streaks becomes smaller When 0 is set this function is disabled Acceptable values 0 to 200 Default 100 Notes If too small a value is set the text may not be printed clearly Black Item to be adjusted Remarks Original mode Text photo Text Photo Gray scale User custom 7401 7402...

Page 424: ...dure 1 Performs FS 05 2 Key in a code and press the START button 3 Key in an adjustment value To correct the value once keyed in press the CLEAR button 4 Press the OK button to store the value The equipment goes back to the ready state 5 To set it again repeat step 2 to 4 6 Turn the power OFF Confirmation If possible perform a Fax transmission and check the adjusted density with the image on the r...

Page 425: ...g the value repeat step 2 to 5 7 Turn the power OFF Confirmation Check the beam level conversion setting with the actual fax data received if possible Code Item to be adjusted Remarks 7595 0 to 4 Adjustment of image density When the value is decreased text becomes lighter Acceptable values 0 to 10 Notes 1 Set not to reverse the large and small number of the setting value corresponding to the sub c...

Page 426: ...er jig to ground on the equipment frame P 6 43 A Installation of the high voltage transformer jig Digital Tester terminal Connect with the black cable thick line of the high voltage transformer jig Connect with the red cable thick line of the high voltage transformer jig Connect with the red cable thin line of the high voltage transformer jig Connect with the gray cable of the high voltage transfo...

Page 427: ... M3 x 8 Red cable thick line Use the screw for the process unit Adapter Use the screw for the process unit Notes The adjustment may damage the drum Therefore be sure to replace the drum with the one that you brought or the one for measurement before starting the adjustment Fig 6 19 1 Open the automatic duplexing unit 2 Open the front cover and take off the toner cartridge 3 Loosen 2 screws and pul...

Page 428: ... jig and fix it with 2 screws Notes Be careful not to let the connector and the harness be caught Fig 6 21 5 Fix the green cable of the high voltage transformer jig to the frame of the equipment Fig 6 22 6 Install the door switch jig 7 Take off the transfer roller unit 8 Close the automatic duplexing unit Fig 6 23 Process unit Green cable Door switch jig ...

Page 429: ...6 45 B Connection for developer bias adjustment Fig 6 24 C Connection for main charger adjustment Fig 6 25 Front cover switch terminal Connect with the black cable thin terminal Connect with the black cable thick Front cover switch terminal Connect with the black cable thin terminal Connect with the red cable thick ...

Page 430: ...ing bias positive and transfer cleaning bias negative adjustment Fig 6 26 E Connection for separation charger adjustment Fig 6 27 Front cover opening closing switch terminal Connect with the black cable thin terminal Connect with the red cable thin Front cover opening closing switch terminal Connect with the black cable thin terminal Connect with the gray cable ...

Page 431: ...d separation charger Fig 6 28 100 A3 A TEST MODE 100 XXX YYY A3 TEST MODE 100 A3 A TEST MODE Return to 1 to enter the other adjustment code FS 05 UP or DOWN Adjust the value YYY to satisfy the following table START Enter the code POWER OFF ON Code No Current set value Keys to press Display OK Adjusted value YYY is stored in memory 1 Item Code 2020 2040 2052 2078 Adjustment value Developer bias Mai...

Page 432: ...rly installed Is there any foreign matter or damage on the transfer roller surface Is the transfer guide deformed Is the process unit properly installed Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum Is the process unit worked correctly Is the toner density low Is the copy paper fed straight Is the copy paper abnormally moist Is the rotation of the registration roller normal Is the separ...

Page 433: ...unit worked correctly Is the toner density low Is the copy paper fed straight Is the copy paper abnormally moist Is the rotation of the registration roller normal Is the output of the main charger normal Is the developer bias an appropriate value Is the transfer output different from the set value Is the separation finger in contact with the drum surface Note for adjustment When poor paper separat...

Page 434: ... Right top cover 3 Take off the original glass P 4 18 4 3 1 Original glass 4 Take off the left top cover P 4 3 4 1 5 Left top cover 5 Move the carriage 1 1 toward the exit side Notes Rotate the drive pulley to move the carriage 6 Loosen the 2 fixing screws of the wire Tighten the screws by aligning the sections 5 and 6 of the carriage 1 with the inside of the exit side frame 2 Notes Confirm that t...

Page 435: ... lens unit the same number of lines needs to be visible P 4 19 4 3 4 Lens unit CCD driving PC board 6 9 3 Belt tension adjustment of the Scan motor 1 Take off the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Hook the belt tension jig 1 to the motor bracket 2 and hook section of the flame 3 3 Loosen the screws 4 and 5 4 The scan motor 6 is pulled by the belt tension jig 1 When it is stopped tighten the scr...

Page 436: ... 6 10 1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding Procedure Bypass feeding The center of the printed image shifts to the front side Move the guide to the front side Arrow A direction in the lower figure The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side Move the guide to the rear side Arrow B direction in the lower figure Fig 6 33 Fig 6 34 1 Loosen the screw 2 Move the entire guide to ...

Page 437: ...eeding 1 Remove 1 screw and the stopper And then take off the drawer Fig 6 36 2 Lift up the drawer paper tray Take off the drawer tray upward by releasing it from a stopper on the front side Fig 6 37 3 Move 1 screw to a position for the adjustment screw If it is already moved skip this step Fig 6 38 Stopper Stopper Drawer tray ...

Page 438: ...sen 2 screws Fig 6 39 5 Move the entire guide to the front or rear side Be sure to move the entire guide until you can see 4 triangles 6 Tighten the 2 screws of the adjustment plate 7 Install the drawer tray drawer and stopper Adjustable range 3 mm to the front side 4 mm to the rear side Unit 1 mm Fig 6 40 Screw A B Scale ...

Page 439: ... developer material Notes Discharge the developer material from the rear side being careful not to let it be scattered on the gear Fig 6 41 5 Turn the adjustment screw to widen the gap so that the jig can be inserted in it Turning the screw clockwise widens the gap Fig 6 42 6 Insert the gauge with the thickness 0 45 of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blad...

Page 440: ...ve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade Confirm that the jig moves smoothly to the front and rear side and the gauge 0 50 cannot be inserted into the gap Fig 6 44 8 Confirm that the side seals are attached on the toner scattering prevention sheet Fig 6 45 Developer sleeve Doctor sleeve jig Side seal Toner scattering prevention sheet ...

Page 441: ...ws Notes 1 After the developer material has been replaced adjust the auto toner sensor See P 6 2 6 2 Adjustment of Auto Toner Sensor 2 When installing the developer unit upper cover make sure that the side seal comes between the developer unit upper cover and rubber seal on the cover Fig 6 46 Fig 6 47 Developer material cover Side seal Rubber seal Developer unit upper cover ...

Page 442: ...t position Notes Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of the RADF A Checking 1 Change the screws of left and right 2 Open the RADF and install 2 positioning pins the positioning pins are installed to the back side of the hinge which is on the left side of the RADF Fig 6 48 3 Remove the platen sheet Fig 6 49 4 Close the RADF and check if the p...

Page 443: ...MENT 6 59 B Adjustment If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes perform the adjustment according to the following procedure 1 Remove the right hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 6 51 2 Loosen the left hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 6 52 3 Loosen the hinge screws at the front side Fig 6 53 MR 3028 ...

Page 444: ...tion the pins with the holes on the RADF by moving it so that the pins fit into the holes when the RADF is closed Fig 6 54 5 Tighten the left hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 6 55 6 Loosen the hole position adjustment screws on the right hand side MR 3021 3022 Fig 6 56 7 Match the screw hole positions Fig 6 57 MR 3028 ...

Page 445: ...MENT 6 61 8 Install the right hand hinge screw at the rear side Fig 6 58 9 Loosen the hinge screws at the front side Fig 6 59 10 Place the platen sheet on the original glass and align it to the top left corner Close the RADF gently and open it to check if the platen sheet is attached properly Fig 6 60 MR 3028 ...

Page 446: ...se the RADF 2 Light the exposure lamp Performs FS 03 Key in 267 and then press the START button The exposure lamp is turned ON for a given length of time 3 Visually check the gap between platen guide holder A and upper surface of the original glass B from the left hand side of the equipment If the value is not within the tolerance perform the adjustment according to the following procedure Toleran...

Page 447: ... adjustment screws on the hinges Adjust the height on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF Fig 6 62 Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the RADF Fig 6 63 Turn it clockwise Heightened Turn it counterclockwise Lowered Turn it clockwise Lowered Turn it counterclockwise Heightened MR 3028 ...

Page 448: ...al with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure Fig 6 64 Chart Original Simplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF select 1 Sided 1 Sided and press the START button 2 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image Duplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face do...

Page 449: ...ying 1 Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew Fig 6 65 2 If the image skew is C as shown in the figure below shift the aligning plate in the direction of and if D shift it to Fig 6 66 Fig 6 67 Shift the aligning plate in the direction of Shift the aligning plate in the direction of C D ...

Page 450: ...hift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew Fig 6 68 2 If the image skew is C as shown in the figure below shift the aligning plate in the direction of and if D shift it to Fig 6 69 Fig 6 70 Shift the aligning plate in the direction of Shift the aligning plate in the direction of C D ...

Page 451: ...cal and horizontal lines in the following procedure Simplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF select 1 Sided 1 Sided and press the START button 2 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy Duplex copying 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face down on the original tr...

Page 452: ...age is smaller than the E margin of the chart enter a value larger than the current one Notes Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0 2 mm 3 Press the OK button Duplex copying 1 Performs FS 05 3045 2 Enter the value If the leading edge F margin of the copy image is larger than the E margin of the chart enter a value smaller than the current one Notes Changing one value shifts the copy image ...

Page 453: ... 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF 2 Press the START button 3 Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned B Adjustment 1 Performs FS 05 3043 If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment enter a value larger than the current one Notes Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0 042...

Page 454: ...wing procedure 1 Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF 2 Press the START button 3 Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension I B Adjustment 1 Performs FS 05 3042 If the copy image dimension I is larger than the chart dimension enter a value smaller than the current one If the copy image dimension I is smaller than the chart d...

Page 455: ...is adjustment is performed in the Adjustment Mode FS 05 4823 1 of the equipment Adjustment scale 0 2mm Adjustable range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm Adjustment direction Increasing the value The alignment plate moves to the center Decreasing the value The alignment plate moves to the edge of paper Adjustment scale 0 2mm Adjustable range 3 0 mm to 3 0 mm Adjustment direction Increasing the value The alignment ...

Page 456: ...alue The distance between the stapling position and the edge of the paper becomes longer Adjustment scale 0 2mm Adjustable range 5 0 mm to 1 0 mm Adjustment direction Increasing the value The distance between the stapling position and the edge of the paper becomes shorter Decreasing the value The distance between the stapling position and the edge of the paper becomes longer Adjustment scale 0 2mm...

Page 457: ...justment is performed in the Adjustment Mode FS 05 4825 of the equipment Adjustment scale 0 2mm Adjustable range 4 0 mm to 1 0 mm Adjustment direction Increasing the value The distance between the punch hole and the trailing edge of the paper becomes shorter Decreasing the value The distance between the punch hole and the trailing edge of the paper becomes longer ...

Page 458: ...t after replacing the Finisher control board or when the alignment position must be changed for some reason 1 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Fig 6 76 Fig 6 77 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously ...

Page 459: ... and then moves to the position of 5 step Fig 6 78 6 When the adjustment is completed press the Button2 on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory When the value is stored normally the LED1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment See the following table for the number of times the LED1 blinks an...

Page 460: ...rol board as shown in the figures below Fig 6 79 Fig 6 80 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops It stops at the position of 20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range SW1 Access cover ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 When adju...

Page 461: ...ing Button 2 with sheets placed on the finishing tray stapled on the rear side Fig 6 81 6 When the adjustment is completed press Button 2 on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray When the value is stored normally LED 1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipmen...

Page 462: ...the equipment 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Fig 6 82 Fig 6 83 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously 5 Press Button1 and Button2 as described in the following table to set the B4 size recycled paper mode Press Button1 and Button2 on ...

Page 463: ...settings are stored normally LED1 on the control panel is lit LED1 blinks if an error occurs In this case turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step 4 7 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 8 Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board 9 Install the board access cover Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks 1 Button1 1 2 Button2 1 Confirms the input value 3 Button1 8 4 ...

Page 464: ... 1 Adjusting procedure 1 1 DIP switch settings 1 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 2 Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover 1 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Fig 6 85 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously ON SW1 1 2 3 4 SW1 1 ...

Page 465: ...ss Button1 and Button2 simultaneously 3 Press Button1 11 times and then press Button2 once 4 Press Button1 8 times and then press Button2 once 5 Press Button1 and Button2 simultaneously 6 Press Button1 11 times and then press Button2 once Check the setting list and press Button1 as many times as noted for Setting code whose paper type you want to select and then press Button2 once Setting list Exa...

Page 466: ... once Then check the setting list and press Button1 as many times as noted for Setting code No 2 whose paper size you want to select then press Button2 once Setting list 2 Press Button1 and Button2 simultaneously Paper size Setting code No 1 Setting code No 2 Others 12 1 A3 12 2 A4 12 3 A4 R 12 4 A5 12 5 A5 R 12 6 A6 R 12 7 B4 12 8 B5 12 9 B5 R 13 1 FOLIO 13 2 LD 13 3 LG 13 4 LT 13 5 LT R 13 6 ST ...

Page 467: ...etting media type and paper size which are set in 1 2 and 1 3 are shown in the table below Normal paper mode Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 Other 2 2 2 2 A3 2 2 2 2 A4 4 4 4 4 A4 R 3 3 3 3 A5 2 2 2 2 A5 R 4 4 4 4 A6 R 2 2 2 2 B4 3 9 9 9 B5 3 3 3 3 B5 R 2 2 2 2 FOLIO 2 2 2 2 LD 5 5 5 5 LG 9 9 9 9 LT 6 6 6 6 LT R 3 3 3 3 ST 2 2 2 2 ST R 3 3 3 3 COMP 2 2 2 2 13 LG 2 2 2 2 8 5 S...

Page 468: ...check the number of LED blinking times Normally the number of LED blinking times is increased by 1 from the default If paper trailing edge still remains increase the number by 2 from the default Example of operation To change the number of LED blinking times from 2 to 3 press Button1 three times 3 Press Button2 once 4 Press Button1 and Button2 simultaneously Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2...

Page 469: ... power of the equipment while pressing the FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button simultaneously 5 Press Button1 11 times and then press Button2 once 6 Press Button1 13 times and then press Button2 once 7 Check the following list and press Button1 as many times as noted for Adjustment value whose switching timing you want to select 8 Press Button2 once 9 Press Button1 and Button2 simultaneously 10...

Page 470: ...the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Fig 6 89 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while pressing the FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button simultaneously 5 Press Button1 11 times press Button2 once press Button1 11 times and then press Button2 once 6 Press Button1 and Button2 simultaneously 7 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 8 Turn OFF all bits of SW1 on the Fin...

Page 471: ...e adjustment value of LT will be applied to the operation with LD LG LT LT R COMP 13 LG 8 5 SQ 1 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the board access cover 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Adjusting for A4 size paper Turn ON pin 2 and 4 Adjusting for LT size paper Turn ON pin 1 2 and 4 Fig 6 91 4 Turn ON the power of the equip...

Page 472: ...lace the adjustment sheet 1 on the process tray and adjust the position to make the gap between paper and the alignment plate 2 0 Then setting is performed at a value that is one smaller than the adjustment value Fig 6 93 Remarks Use an adjustment sheet 1 made of plastic resin which is light and accurate in measurement e g OHP film To reduce frictional resistance with the vertical alignment roller...

Page 473: ... stored normally the LED1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment See the following table for the number of times the LED1 blinks and its corresponding adjustment value 8 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 9 Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board 10 Install the board access cover Number of Blinking Ad...

Page 474: ...ting the front side for A4 size paper Turn ON pin 3 and 4 When adjusting the rear side for LT size paper Turn ON pin 1 2 3 and 4 When adjusting the front side for LT size paper Turn ON pin 2 3 and 4 Fig 6 94 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops It ...

Page 475: ...sing Button 2 with sheets placed on the finishing tray stapled on the rear side Fig 6 95 6 When the adjustment is completed press Button 2 on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray When the value is stored normally LED 1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipme...

Page 476: ... then perform adjustment accordingly For stapling and folding paper on the stacker of the stacker unit is moved to an exclusive mechanism for stapling or folding Therefore adjustment must be performed individually for the folding stopping position of the stacker and the stapling stopping position Check the folding position at the centerfold page of the sample Fig 6 96 Check the stapling position a...

Page 477: ...e the folding stopping position the position of the stapling hooks of the stacker downward P 6 96 2 Folding position adjustment Fig 6 100 When the stapling position is deviated from the specified one more than 0 50 mm Decrease the value of the stapling position adjustment in order to move the stapling stopping position the position of the stapling hooks of the stacker downward P 6 94 1 Saddle stap...

Page 478: ... cover 1 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Turn ON pin 1 and 4 Fig 6 102 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously 5 Press Button 1 on the touch panel 10 times and then press Button 2 once Then press Button 1 once again and Button 2 once again Adjustment of LD and A3 paper starts Fig 6 103 ON...

Page 479: ...ves to the position of 7 steps 7 When the adjustment is completed press Button 2 on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory When the value is stored normally LED 1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment 8 Press Button 1 and Button 2 Adjustment of LD and A3 paper finishes 9 Press Button 1 on the...

Page 480: ...r 1 3 Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below Turn ON pin 1 and 4 Fig 6 104 4 Turn ON the power of the equipment while FUNCTION CLEAR button and START button are pressed simultaneously 5 Press Button 1 on the touch panel 10 times and then press Button 2 once Then press Button 1 again 2 times and Button 2 once again Adjustment of LD and A3 paper starts Fig 6 105 ON 1...

Page 481: ...of 7 steps 7 When the adjustment is completed press Button 2 on the finisher control panel to store the adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray When the value is stored normally LED 1 on the control panel will blink for a number of times that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment 8 Press Button 1 and Button 2 Adjustment of LD and A3 paper finishes 9 Pres...

Page 482: ...nt Perform this adjustment when the folding position for saddle stitching is tilted 1 Turn OFF the power of the equipment 2 Open the cover pull out the saddle stitch section and then loosen the 2 screws Fig 6 106 3 Rotate the adjustment screw slightly Fig 6 107 4 Tighten the 2 screws return the saddle stitch section and then close the cover Fig 6 108 ...

Page 483: ...ch control PC board This setting is performed when the hole punch control PC board HP 1 is replaced with a DIP switch 2 on it Fig 6 109 Refer to the table below for the destination settings Destination Number of punch holes DIP switch 1 2 MJ 6007E Europe Japan China 2 holes OFF OFF MJ 6007N North America 2 3 holes ON OFF MJ 6007F France 4 holes OFF ON MJ 6007S Sweden 4 holes ON ON 1 2 ON 2 1 ...

Page 484: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved SETTING ADJUSTMENT 6 100 ...

Page 485: ... process unit K explained below is a photoconductive drum or a cleaner unit which includes a photoconductive drum The developer material K explained below is a developer material or a developer unit which includes a developer material The PM part other than the process unit explained below is a fuser roller or a fuser unit which includes a fuser roller 7 2 2 PM display conditions The conditions of...

Page 486: ... follows If the value of FS 08 9891 Warning message on the touch panel when PM time has come is set to 0 No warning notification the PM display is not performed regardless of the settings above Default value is 1 Display warning notification PM display by specifying the number of prints 1 Key in 0 for FS 08 6198 Switching of output pages driving counts at PM process unit K 2 Key in the value of th...

Page 487: ...the counter in the 20 PM Support Mode when the maintenance is finished The reset condition of each counter is as follows FS 08 6194 Current value of PM counter process unit K FS 08 6195 Current value of PM time counter process unit K When the current value of CLEANER DRUM on the main screen or DRUM on the sub screen in the PM support mode is cleared the counter is reset FS 08 5568 Current value of...

Page 488: ...g checklist and illustrations Refer to the Service Manual if necessary 3 Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished Then turn ON the power and make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly PM SUPPORT CODE LIST S N Cxxxxxxxx FIN S N FIN S N xxxxxxxx TOTAL 2146 20xx 04 09 13 16 TOSHIBA e STUDIOxxxx DF TOTAL 1213 UNIT OUTPUT PAGES PM OUTPUT PAGES DRIVE COUNTS P...

Page 489: ...ation more efficiently when replacing The replacement record can be printed out in the 30 List Printing Mode 7 4 2 Operational flow and operational screen 1 Operational flow Fig 7 2 When the authentication screen appears press OK Enter the password if one has been set The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the CANCEL button is pressed after moving from the ma...

Page 490: ...present drive counts is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the present number of print develop pages When there are differences among the sub units parts _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top is displayed next to the present number when the number of print develop pages has exceeded its PM standa...

Page 491: ...unts and previous replacement date for a chosen sub unit Moving to the next previous page Displaying of the standard number of drive counts to replace the sub unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number Displaying of the standard number of print develop pages to replace the sub unit pa...

Page 492: ...ENANCE PM 7 8 3 Clear screen Fig 7 5 When the INITIALIZE button is pressed Present number of print develop pages and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated When the CANCEL button is pressed the counter is not cleared and the display returns to the main or sub screen 1 2 1 2 ...

Page 493: ...Separation finger for fuser roller SEPARATION FINGER FUSER Upper drawer 1st CST Pickup roller PICK UP ROLLER 1st CST Feed roller FEED ROLLER 1st CST Separation roller SEP ROLLER 1st CST Lower drawer 2nd CST Pickup roller PICK UP ROLLER 2nd CST Feed roller FEED ROLLER 2nd CST Separation roller SEP ROLLER 2nd CST Bypass unit SFB Feed roller FEED ROLLER SFB Separation pad SEP PAD SFB RADF RADF Pickup...

Page 494: ...ler is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts Example 1 When the number of output pages has reached the specified level Example 2 When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified level The ...

Page 495: ...nit is a new one the series of operations required at the replacement counter reset for supply items in the EPU auto toner sensor initial adjustment and automatic gamma adjustment is smoothly performed Notes If only the supply items in the EPU at PM are to be replaced perform the life counter reset for each supply item if developer material is to be replaced perform the auto toner sensor adjustmen...

Page 496: ...he front cover then set the toner cartridge Press OK Press OK Place the printed gamma chart on the original glass then press OK Press the ON OFF button for a few seconds Operation flow Display transition of control panel Behavior flow of equipment Test mode Adjustment mode Open the front cover and set the toner cartridge Close the cover Press OK Set A4 LT paper in the drawer and press OK If it can...

Page 497: ...w one and performing wrong operations such as supply item counter reset In this case turn the power OFF and then back ON in the normal mode The equipment returns to its normal operations If IC chip information is not written as used IC chip in step 1 an error C3D0 is displayed If it occurs perform the maintenance of each part according to the Troubleshooting If you press CANCEL in step 3 the 21 EP...

Page 498: ...self must be replaced with a new one service part or the IC chip data must be overwritten using a jig If the EPUs are replaced in the 20 PM Support Mode instead of the 21 EPU Replacement Mode noted in this chapter the replacement of the EPU board and the overwriting of the IC chip data are not necessary Information in the IC chip can be confirmed with FS 08 4555 Information check of new or old EPU...

Page 499: ...alled fuse is selected replace that the fuse with a new one because it will have been blown out 2 Install the fuser unit in the equipment 3 Turn the power ON If the fuser unit is then judged determined to be new the fuser related life counters are automatically cleared 7 6 3 Counters to be cleared FS 08 6346 Fuser roller counter FS 08 6350 Pressure roller counter FS 08 6368 Fuser roller separation...

Page 500: ...n equals to the number of sheets fed from each paper source Be careful not to put oil on the rollers belts and belt pulleys when lubricating Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement Operation check A Clean with alcohol B Clean with soft pad cloth or vacuum cleaner L Launa 40 SI Silicon oil W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 AV Alvania No 2 FL Floil GE 334C CG Conductiv...

Page 501: ...aining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Original glass A or B 22 3 b ADF original glass B 22 1 c Mirror 1 B d Mirror 2 B e Mirror 3 B f Reflector B 23 5 g Lens B 12 13 h Exposure lamp R3 23 3 ...

Page 502: ...508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 18 7 7 2 Laser optical unit Fig 7 8 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Slit glass B a ...

Page 503: ... 80 80 17 20 b Feed roller R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 17 27 c Separation roller AV W2 R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 17 6 d Transport roller 1st 2nd A R3 18 3 18 18 e Registration roller A R3 13 17 21 1 f Bypass Feed roller R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 5 g Bypass Separation pad AV W2 R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 20 4 h Bypass tray B i Paper guide B j Drive gear tooth face and shaft W1 k Plastic bushing bearing W1 l Bypass dri...

Page 504: ... amount of white grease Molykote HP 300 on the places of the holder shown in the figure 4 places Notes Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered e Registration roller Pusher Apply 2 rice sized grains of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the 2 contact points of the registration roller rubber and the pusher Fig 7 12 Fig 7 10 Fig 7 11 Apply grea...

Page 505: ... roller metal C Do not apply grease to gear teeth which contact the registration roller clutch gear D Apply a blob of grease the size of a rice grain to the gear teeth of the registration roller clutch Be careful not to use too much E Do not apply grease to the side of the registration roller clutch gear Wipe off any grease Notes Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the ge...

Page 506: ... LED B c Whole cleaner unit B d Drum cleaning blade R1 80 100 120 125 150 150 27 8 e Separation finger for drum R1 80 100 120 125 150 150 27 12 f Recovery blade B R1 80 100 120 125 150 150 27 10 g Ozone filter R1 240 200 240 250 300 300 13 14 h Transfer roller R1 80 100 120 125 150 150 26 5 i Separation needle B R3 26 11 j Transfer guide B k Separation cover B 26 12 l Transfer roller guide roller ...

Page 507: ...y blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get damaged When cleaning the inside of the cleaner unit be careful of the following in order not to damage the film attached on the toner recovery auger Do not use an air blower for cleaning Use a vacuum cleaner When using a vacuum cleaner be careful not to hit the nozzle of the vacuum cleaner to the film When rotating the ton...

Page 508: ...h a new one if it is damaged regardless of the number of output pages which have been mode Notes Do not touch the needle electrode with your bare hand when attaching the needle electrode 7 7 5 Developer section Fig 7 15 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Whole developer unit B b Developer material R1 80 100 120 125 150 150 c Front shield...

Page 509: ...or g Oil seal Mixer unit Shafts of mixers 1 2 and 3 6 pcs During replacement coat the oil seal with grease Alvanian No 2 1 Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or outside of the holder Pay attention to the direction in which the oil seal is attached See figure on right 2 Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of the oil seal Amount About two small...

Page 510: ... Parts list P I a Fuser roller A W2 R1 240 200 240 250 300 300 31 15 b Pressure roller A R1 240 200 240 250 300 300 32 8 c Separation finger for fuser roller A R1 240 200 240 125 150 150 31 22 d Fuser unit entrance guide A 32 11 e Thermistor 3 pcs A R3 31 12 31 13 f Drive gear tooth face and shaft W2 R3 31 11 g Fuser roller gear R3 31 18 h Exit sensor actuator A 32 25 b e c a h 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm b...

Page 511: ...eformed If there is any problem with it replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages which have been made Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily e Thermistor Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner o...

Page 512: ...r exit section Reverse section Fig 7 18 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Exit reverse guide A b Exit roller A R3 33 3 c Transport roller A R3 34 8 d Reverse roller A R3 34 15 e Drive gear SI 33 19 f Conductive bushing CG 33 6 c a a d b b 20ppm 25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm ...

Page 513: ...008A PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 29 7 7 8 Automatic duplexing unit Fig 7 19 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Transport roller upper and lower A R3 35 2 35 3 b Drive gear W1 35 17 35 18 a a a a 20 ppm25ppm 30ppm 35ppm 45ppm 50ppm ...

Page 514: ...the places of the holder shown in the figure 4 places Notes Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Pickup roller upper lower A R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 6 20 b Feed roller upper lower A R1 80 80 80 80 80 80 6 27 c Separation roller upper lower A AV...

Page 515: ...ENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 31 7 7 10 LCF Fig 7 23 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Pickup roller A R1 160 160 160 160 160 160 b Feed roller A R1 160 160 160 160 160 160 c Separation roller A R1 160 160 160 160 160 160 d Drive gear W1 a b c d ...

Page 516: ...ler Apply one rice grain amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to each part A in the figure below Fig 7 25 Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I a Idling roller A or B W1 b Other rollers A or B c Paper guide A or B d JSP upper stuck sensor B 1 51 e JSP lower stuck sensor B 1 12 f JSP paper jam sensor B c f e b a b d A ...

Page 517: ... c Feed roller A R1 120 5 1 d Registration roller A e Intermediate transfer roller A f Front read roller A g Rear read roller A h Reverse registration roller A i Exit reverse roller A j Platen sheet A or B Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Coating Replacement x 1 000 sheets Operation check Parts list P I 1 Pickup roller A 120 2 Separation roller A 120 3 Feed roller A 120 4 Registration roller A ...

Page 518: ...very 30 000 of paper feeding times Cleaning Wipe with a cloth soaked in water and then tightly squeezed Small roller in the paper transport section Transport path and guides Transport path sensor Wipe with a dry cloth Grease application to drive unit As needed Applying grease EM 50L Paper detection sensor Minimum maintenance interval set for the equipment Cleaning Wipe with a dry cloth or alco hol...

Page 519: ...arts list P I a Stack transport roller 1 A b Stack transport roller 2 A c Buffer roller A d Exit roller A e Entrance roller A f Transport roller A g Paddle R1 1 000 h Paper holder cam W1 i Buffer tray shaft W1 j Stapler carrier shaft W1 k Rack pinion gear Aligning plate W1 l Movable tray drive gear W1 m Buffer tray guide W1 n Finishing tray shaft W1 o Grate shaped guide A C a b n c d f l i g k m e...

Page 520: ...VENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 36 h Paper holder cam Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L all around the paper holder cam Fig 7 28 i Buffer tray shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the entire buffer tray shaft Fig 7 29 Paper holder cam Buffer tray shaft ...

Page 521: ...apler carrier shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the entire stapler carrier shaft Fig 7 30 k Rack gear pinion gear Aligning plate l Movable tray drive gear Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the gear teeth of the gear A and gear B Fig 7 31 Stapler carrier shaft Gear A Gear B ...

Page 522: ...ate Fig 7 32 n Finishing tray shaft 1 Take off the metal shield plate If the hole punch unit is installed take it off beforehand 2 Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the metal shield plate has been removed Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the gear teeth of the rack and pinion gears which drive the aligning plate and the entire finishing tray sha...

Page 523: ...cleaning brush to apply coating material SANKOL CFD 409M on the part with which the paper edge is in contact Use a cleaning brush 4407915710 BRUSH 33 because cloth contaminated with the coating material shall be treated as industrial waste Do not apply coating material Molykote PD 910 to the rubber section of the grate shaped tray When coating material adheres to the skin rinse it well with water ...

Page 524: ...check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x1 000 Operation check Parts list P I a Entrance sensor S1 A b Transport sensor S2 A c Stack transport roller 1 A d Stack transport roller 2 A e Buffer roller A f Exit roller A g Entrance roller A h Transport roller A i Paddle R1 1 000 j Paper pusher cam W1 k Buffer tray shaft W1 Front side Rear side a f g h j k l o q i b c p d m n e ...

Page 525: ... paper pusher cam 1 Fig 7 36 k Buffer tray shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the entire buffer tray shaft 1 Fig 7 37 l Stapler carrier shaft W1 m Rack gear Aligning plate W1 n Finishing tray shaft W1 o Movable tray drive gear W1 p Additional folding unit carrier shaft W1 q Grate shaped guide A C Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Replacement x1 000 Operation check ...

Page 526: ...ck gear Aligning plate n Finishing tray shaft 1 Take off the junction box unit Refer to MJ 1106 Service Manual chapter4 If the hole punch unit is installed take it off beforehand 2 Apply oil as follows through the opening which shows up when the junction box unit has been removed Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the gear teeth of the rack gear 1 which drive the aligning ...

Page 527: ...CE PM 7 43 o Movable tray drive gear Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote HP 300 to the gear teeth of the movable tray drive gear 1 Fig 7 40 p Additional folding unit carrier shaft Apply an adequate amount of white grease Molykote EM 30L to the entire Additional folding unit carrier shaft 1 Fig 7 41 1 1 ...

Page 528: ...leaning brush to apply coating material SANKOL CFD 409M on the part with which the paper edge is in contact Use a cleaning brush 4407915710 BRUSH 33 because cloth contaminated with the coating material shall be treated as industrial waste Do not apply coating material Molykote PD 910 to the rubber section of the grate shaped tray When coating material adheres to the skin rinse it well with water F...

Page 529: ...rs belts and belt pulleys when lubricating 3 Page Item P I is described in the column of the Parts list 4 This unit may require replacement once or more over the period of machine warranty because of deterioration or damage Replace them as needed Items to check 1 Cleaning Lubrication 2 Replacement x1 000 Operation check Parts list P I 3 1 Transport roller A O 2 Sensors B 3 Drive gears W1 O 4 Punch...

Page 530: ...ure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity chemicals and or their fumes 3 Drum cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10 C to 35 C and should also be protected against high humidity chemicals and or their fumes 4 Fuser roller Pressure roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity chemicals ...

Page 531: ...lade and the drum Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade 3 Installation of the equipment and storage of drum Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature high humidity chemicals and or their fumes Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such as near a window Otherwise the drum will fa...

Page 532: ...is may damage the PET sheet 7 8 4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller 1 Handling precautions Fuser roller Do not leave any oil fingerprints etc on the fuser roller Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser roller or it may be damaged possibly resulting in poor cleaning Pressure roller Do not leave any oil fingerprints etc on the pressure roller 2...

Page 533: ...Do not allow oil or fingerprints to come in contact with the surface Do not hit or scratch the surface Make sure you do not get any bits of thread etc on the surface Do not allow solvent such as thinner to come in contact with the surface Keep away from a source of heat 2 Cleaning procedure If bits of thread or similar adhere to the surface remove them with gloves or a pair of tweezers Be careful ...

Page 534: ...um 2 27 12 Main charger grid 1 25 11 Needle electrode 1 25 6 Transfer roller 1 26 5 Developer material 1 FR KIT 4590 Fuser roller 1 31 15 Pressure roller 1 32 8A Separation finger for fuser roller 5 31 22 Ozone filter 1 13 14 FR KIT 3020 Fuser roller 1 31 15 Pressure roller 1 32 8B Separation finger for fuser roller 1 31 22 Ozone filter 1 13 14 PM KIT ROLLER 1 Feed roller 1 17 20 Transport roller ...

Page 535: ...urpose Parts list P I 1 Door switch jig Used to adjust high voltage transformer 101 1 2 Brush Cleaning inside of the equipment 101 2 3 Doctor sleeve jig Measuring the gap between the development sleeve and the doctor blade 101 3 4 Wire holder jig Fixing the wire at the assembly of the carriage wire 101 5 5 Belt tension jig Adjusting the belt tension at the installation of the scan motor 101 6 6 Hi...

Page 536: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PM 7 52 Fig 7 43 2 3 1 7 8 9 10 4 5 6 11 ...

Page 537: ...The greases used for the maintenance of this equipment are as follows Grease name Volume Container Parts list P I SI Silicon oil 25cc Bottle 101 16 L Launa 40 100cc Oiler 101 11 W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 10g Bottle 101 12B AV Alvania No 2 100g Tube 101 13 W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L 100g Tube 101 14 FL Floil GE 334C 20g Bottle 101 15 ...

Page 538: ...leaning A Clean with alcohol B Clean with soft pad cloth or vacuum cleaner Lubrication Coating W1 White grease Molykote EM 30L W2 White grease Molykote HP 300 Replacement Value Replacement cycle R1 Replacement R2 For preventive maintenance check if the parts are damaged and replace them as required If the parts are not replaced at the machine refreshing interval inspect them at the subsequent PM R...

Page 539: ...er to 8 4Troubleshooting for the Image to remove its cause The cause of a trouble in the equipment may be a minor failure Check the items below first 1 Is there any problem with the power cable Check if the power cable is inserted securely When it is almost removed or not inserted securely power voltage may become unstable causing a trouble in the equipment 2 Are the connectors connected securely ...

Page 540: ... 104 Pixel counter data Toner cartridge standard 9S 106 Error history 1000 cases max 9S 108 Firmware update log 200 cases max 9S 110 Power on off log 100 cases max 3 For image related problems collect image samples with the problem areas and the feeding direction marked first Then provide information about the media type and weight and the print data spool files for duplicating the problem 4 For a...

Page 541: ...debug logs Internal operation Job history HDD memory usage status etc Personal Corporate information address book not included When the debug logs are collected also do so for the following information since it may be difficult to investigate only using the debug log List print mode 9 START 300 All CSV files Job logs below in TopAccess Logs Export Logs Print Job Log Export Fax Transmission Journal...

Page 542: ...d 3 When the collection of the debug logs is finished beeping is heard 4 After the beeping has stopped remove the USB device Notes Do not remove the USB device while the LED in the MFP is blinking If the LED does not start blinking after the USB device is inserted and a few minutes have passed try the procedure from step 1 again If there is no beeping after the LED starts blinking about 20 minutes...

Page 543: ... help them to understand it 1 Management No A management No consists of 13 digits with letters of the alphabet and numbers The following shows the meaning of each block From the 1st to 4th digits Classification From the 5th to 10th digits Production date From the 11th to 13th digits Sequential numbers 2 Applicable units A traceability label is attached to the following units Classification Product...

Page 544: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 6 3 Label attachment position Fig 8 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 ...

Page 545: ...er in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the equipment P 8 101 E065 Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the equipment P 8 101 E090 HDD abnormality causes jam Image data to be printed cannot be prepared P 8 84 E110 Paper misfeeding ADU misfeeding Paper not reaching the registration sensor The paper which has passed ...

Page 546: ...sor after it has passed the 2nd transport sensor P 8 73 E320 PFP upper drawer transport jam Paper not reaching the 2nd transport sensor The paper does not reach the 2nd transport sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor P 8 74 E330 PFP lower drawer transport jam Paper not reaching the registration sensor The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the 1s...

Page 547: ...0 Paper transport jam ADU section Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in the exit section P 8 75 E520 Stop jam in the ADU The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor P 8 77 E550 Other jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path The paper is remaining on the transport path w...

Page 548: ... its leading edge has reached this sensor P 8 108 E860 RADF jam access cover open The RADF jam access cover has opened during RADF operation P 8 109 E870 RADF open jam RADF has opened during RADF operation P 8 109 E871 Cover open jam in the read ready status Jam caused by opening of the RADF jam access cover or front cover while the RADF is waiting for the scanning start signal from the equipment ...

Page 549: ...aining for a longer period than specified MJ 1032 MJ 1033 P 8 118 P 8 119 EA21 Paper size error jam Paper does not reach the sensor because the paper is shorter than spec MJ 1101 1107 MJ 1106 1108 P 8 119 EA22 Paper transport jam Finisher paper punching edge detection sensor The paper position sensor on the Finisher transport path detects paper shorter than the acceptable paper size MJ 1101 1107 M...

Page 550: ...dge of the paper has passed the entrance path sensor but does not reach the middle path sensor in the Finisher Unit transport path MJ 1032 P 8 123 EA2B Paper transport jam in the Finisher middle path sensor The paper remains at the middle path sensor for a longer period than specified while being transported on the Finisher Unit transport path MJ 1032 P 8 124 EA2C Paper transport jam in the Finish...

Page 551: ...r from the equipment arrives at the Finisher too early MJ 1032 MJ 1033 P 8 130 EA70 Stack exit belt home position error The stack exit belt is not at the home position MJ 1101 1107 MJ 1106 1108 P 8 131 EA80 Finisher jam Saddle Stitcher section Stapling jam Stapling is not performed properly MJ 1032 MJ 1033 P 8 132 EA81 The detection of the home position of the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller dr...

Page 552: ...nd finisher at the start of printing P 8 137 EB50 Paper transport jam Paper remaining on the transport path The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper P 8 79 EB60 Paper remaining on the transport path The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper redetection after no jam is detected at EB50 P 8 82 ED10 Finisher jam Finisher sec...

Page 553: ...tacker motor home position cannot be detected MJ 1106 1108 P 8 146 EF17 Saddle Stitch Finisher folding blade home position detection abnormality The folding blade home position cannot be detected MJ 1106 1108 P 8 146 EF18 Saddle Stitch Finisher additional folding roller home position detection abnormality The additional folding roller home position cannot be detected MJ 1106 1108 P 8 147 EF19 Sadd...

Page 554: ...end fence is not moving normally P 8 154 C1B0 LCF transport motor abnormality The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally P 8 155 C260 Scanning system related service call Peak detection error Lighting of the exposure lamp white reference is not detected when power is turned ON P 8 156 C261 Peak detection error high light intensity e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 only P 8 158 C262 Peak detec...

Page 555: ...se in a specified period of time after power is turned ON e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 only P 8 172 C445 Thermistor or heater abnormality at power ON Abnormality of service call the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 only P 8 172 C447 Thermist...

Page 556: ...5 CB30 Movable tray shift motor abnormality The movable tray shift motor is not rotating or the movable tray is not moving normally MJ 1101 1107 Movable tray shift motor abnormality The movable tray shift motor or the movable tray does not work properly MJ 1032 Movable tray shift motor abnormality The movable tray shift motor or the movable tray does not work properly MJ 1033 P 8 186 P 8 187 P 8 1...

Page 557: ...r abnormality Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally P 8 198 CB91 Saddle Stitch Finisher flash ROM abnormality MJ 1106 1108 P 8 199 CB92 Saddle Stitch Finisher RAM abnormality MJ 1106 1108 P 8 199 CB93 Additional folding motor abnormality MJ 1106 1108 P 8 199 CB94 Saddle transport motor abnormality MJ 1106 1108 P 8 200 CB95 Stacker motor abnormality...

Page 558: ...103 is installed MJ 1107 1108 when MJ 6104 is installed P 8 207 CC52 Skew adjustment motor M1 abnormality Skew adjustment motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally MJ 1101 1106 when MJ 6103 is installed MJ 1107 1108 when MJ 6104 is installed P 8 209 CC53 An abnormality occurs in the punch waste full sensor P 8 209 CC54 Hole punch registration sensor detection error An abnormality o...

Page 559: ...call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board P 8 179 F100_0 Other service call HDD format error Operation of HDD key data fails P 8 219 F100_1 HDD format error Encryption key data of either the SYS board or the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged P 8 219 F100_2 HDD format error Encryption key data of both the SYS board and the SRAM board for the SYS board are damaged P 8 220 F101_0 HDD connection e...

Page 560: ...ata damage P 8 232 F109_2 Key consistency error Signature Check public key damage P 8 232 F109_3 Key consistency error HDD encryption parameter damage P 8 233 F109_4 Key consistency error license data damage P 8 234 F109_5 Key consistency error Encryption key for ADI HDD is damaged P 8 235 F109_6 Key consistency error Administrator password error for ADI HDD authentication P 8 237 F110 Communicati...

Page 561: ...tem start error P 8 242 F521 Integrity check error P 8 242 F550 Encryption partition error P 8 242 F600 Software update error P 8 242 F700 Overwrite error P 8 243 F800 Date error P 8 243 F900 Model information error P 8 244 F901 Engine speed error The speed information of the LGC board is damaged P 8 245 F901_1 Engine speed error The speed information of the LGC board is damaged P 8 245 Error code...

Page 562: ...File deletion failure Y Y 1C33 Internet fax related error File access failure Y Y 1C40 Internet fax related error Image conversion abnormality Y Y 1C60 Internet fax related error Syntax error command unrecognized HDD full failure during processing Y Y 1C61 Internet fax related error Address book reading failure Y Y 1C63 Internet fax related error Terminal IP address unset Y Y 1C64 Internet fax rel...

Page 563: ...eserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 25 1CC1 Internet fax related error Power failure Y Y Error code Classification Message Contents Error code display media Troubles hooting Panl JL ML Noti Cf Pjl ...

Page 564: ...parameters or arguments HOST NAME error RFC 501 Destination mail address error RFC 501 Terminal mail address error RFC 501 Y Y 2503 RFC related error Bad sequence of commands Destination mail address error RFC 503 Y Y 2504 RFC related error Command parameter not implemented HOST NAME error RFC 504 Y Y 2550 RFC related error Mailbox unavailable Destination mail address error RFC 550 Y Y 2551 RFC re...

Page 565: ...ation failure Y 2A70 Remote scanning related error Insufficient permission to execute RemoteScan Remote Scan privilege check error Y 2A71 Remote scanning related error Insufficient permission to execute WS Scan WS Scan privilege check error Y 2A72 Remote scanning related error Insufficient permission to access e Filing box using scan utility e Filing data access privilege check error Scan Utility ...

Page 566: ...rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 28 2AD4 Remote scanning related error e Filing data was downloaded by scan utility e Filing data downloading Scan Utility Error code Classification Message Contents Error code display media Troubles hooting Panl JL ML Noti Cf Pjl ...

Page 567: ...ed to print images from the document box List library error Y Y 2B71 e Filing box related error Document s expire s in a few days There are documents which will expire in a few days Y Y 2B80 e Filing box related error Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing nearly full Hard disk space in BOX partition is nearly full 90 Y Y 2B90 e Filing box related error Insufficient Memory Insufficient memory capac...

Page 568: ...eached Exceeding the maximum number of pages Y Y 2BF1 e Filing box related error Maximum number of document range is reached Exceeding the maximum number of documents Y Y 2BF2 e Filing box related error Maximum number of folder range is reached Exceeding the maximum number of folders Y Y Error code Classification Message Contents Error code display media Troubles hooting Panl JL ML Noti Cf Pjl ...

Page 569: ...specified Invalid parameter Y Y 2C15 E mail related error Email size exceeded limit or maximum size Exceeding file capacity Y Y 2C20 E mail related error Illegal Job status System management module access abnormality Y Y 2C21 E mail related error Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Y Y 2C22 E mail related error Illegal Job status Job control module access abnormality Y Y 2C30 ...

Page 570: ...rver Server time out error Y Y 2C69 E mail related error Failed to connect to SMTP server SMTP server connection error Y Y 2C6A E mail related error Failed to send E Mail message HOST NAME error No RFC error Y Y 2C6B E mail related error Invalid address specified in From field Terminal mail address error Y Y 2C6C E mail related error Invalid address specified in To field Destination mail address e...

Page 571: ... status System access abnormality Y Y 2D11 File sharing related error Not enough memory Insufficient memory Y Y 2D12 File sharing related error Illegal Job status Message reception error Y Y 2D13 File sharing related error Illegal Job status Message transmission error Y Y 2D14 File sharing related error Invalid parameter specified Invalid parameter Y Y 2D15 File sharing related error Document size...

Page 572: ...e sharing related error FTP service is not available FTP service not available Y Y 2D68 File sharing related error File Sharing service is not available File sharing service not available Y Y 2D69 File sharing related error NetWare service is not available NetWare service not available Y Y 2D70 File sharing related error OCR functions not available Y Y 2DA0 File sharing related error Expired scan ...

Page 573: ...age Y Y 2E02 File sharing related error Successful completion saving of a received EmailtoFile Filein a USB storage Y Y 2E10 File sharing related error Failed to store document s in USB folder System access abnormality in USB storage Y Y 2E11 File sharing related error Failed to store document s in USB folder Insufficient memory capacity for USB storage Y Y 2E12 File sharing related error Failed t...

Page 574: ...aring related error Creating the image file was not permitted Encryption PDF enforced mode error in USB storage Y 2E45 File sharing related error Failed in making meta data Meta data creation error in USB storage Scan to File Y Y 2E65 File sharing related error There are too many documents in folders Failed in creating new document File creation error due to insufficient USB folder capacity Y Y 2E...

Page 575: ...E mail reception related error Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable Warning of partial mail interruption Y Y 3A80 E mail reception related error Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled Partial mail reception setting OFF Y Y 3B10 E mail reception related error Format Error has been detected in the received mail E...

Page 576: ...transmission disable error Y Y 3D10 E mail reception related error SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail This mail was deleted Destination address error Y Y 3D20 E mail reception related error Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail Maximum number of offramp destination error Y Y 3D30 E mail reception related error Fax Board Error has bee...

Page 577: ...ror has been occurred in this mail The mail could not be received until File I O is recovered File I O error Y Y 3F20 E mail reception related error File I O Error has been occurred in this mail The mail could not be received until File I O is recovered File I O error Y Y Error code Classification Message Contents Error code display media Troubles hooting Panl JL ML Noti Cf Pjl ...

Page 578: ...processing The power of the equipment is turned OFF during a print job copy list print network print process Y 4031 Printer error HDD full during print A large amount of image data is saved in an HDD at private print or invalid network print Y 4032 Printer error Exceeding the upper limit of the registration number for the sharing jobs No more sharing jobs can be registered because its registration...

Page 579: ...and user The number of the assigned pages set by the department and user management has reached 0 Y 4112 Printer error Quota over error no quota in a user The number of the assigned pages set by the user management has reached 0 Y 4113 Printer error Quota over error no quota in a department The number of the assigned pages set by the department management has reached 0 Y 4121 Printer error Job can...

Page 580: ...is set to disabled Y 4221 Printer error Private print only error Jobs other than Private print ones have been performed Y 4231 Printer error Hardcopy security printing error A hardcopy security printing job has been performed when the function is restricted Y 4243 Printer error Sharing job An error caused by not having a license Y 4244 Printer error Sharing job An error caused by function disabled...

Page 581: ...tion failure Data or a file whose printing is attempted may be corrupted Network print Data are corrupted or invalid Direct print A file is corrupted or not in a supported format Y 4412 Printer error Double sign encoding error A double sign encoding error has occurred because the PDF file is encrypted in a forbiddenlanguage or in a language not supported Y 4611 Printer error Font download failure ...

Page 582: ...nt Y 4613 Printer error Font download failure others A new font cannot be registered due to other abnormalities Y 4621 Printer error Downloaded font deletion failure The specified font cannot be deleted because it does not exist it is undeletable or any another abnormality has occurred Y 4F10 Printer error Printing has not been performed successfully due to other abnormalities Y Error code Classif...

Page 583: ...itoring system error Communication error between e Bridge Communication is attempted while e Bridge is enabled for some reason such as a version upgrade Y 5014 Communication error TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error No SSL certificate There is no SSL certificate or the certificate is not in a correct file format Y 5015 Communication error TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error Inv...

Page 584: ... Communication with TOSHIBA Remote monitoring system succeeded Successful communication with an eBR2 server Y 5030 Communication error An error has occurred in the HTTP communication Y 50FF Communication error A fatal error has occurred in the MFP Y 5110 Communication error Toner cartridge detection error 5211 Communication error PM counter excess 5212 Communication error Appears when the time for...

Page 585: ...em error Communication error Y Y 5416 Communication error TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error Setting files system software update error Y Y 5417 Communication error TOSHIBA Global remote monitoring system error System software error Y Y 5BD0 Communication error Power failure occurred during restore Power supply has been cut off during the restoration of the database sent from TopAccess ...

Page 586: ... access error Failed user login User login to MFP failure Y Y 6008 MFP access error Failed to connect on External LDAP server for Role Base Access Control Connection failure to an external Role Base Access Control LDAP server Y Y 6009 MFP access error Failed user login Authenticatio n server connection error User login failure to an MFP during NIC initialization Y Y 600A MFP access error Departmen...

Page 587: ...or Card Authentication Failed because of Card Reading Error Card authentication Y Y 6042 MFP access error Card Authentication Failed because of setting Error Card authentication Y Y 6043 MFP access error Card Authentication Failed because the card information was duplicated on the card server Card authentication failure duplication of card information Y Y 6044 MFP access error Communication Error ...

Page 588: ...t Y Y 6063 MFP access error Department code has not been assigned to the user PIN authentication Department code not assigned to a user Y Y 6064 MFP access error Cannot find the Home Directory PIN authentication Home directory not found Y Y 6065 MFP access error Failed to register the user by automatically Maxi mum number of registered users PIN authentication User automatic registration failure d...

Page 589: ...ess error Print Log near full 80 Used Print log database nearly full 80 Y Y 6154 MFP access error Print Log near full 70 Used Print log database nearly full 70 Y Y 6160 MFP access error Scan Log full 100 Used Log OverWrite will be start Scan log database full Y Y 6161 MFP access error Scan Log near full 95 Used Scan log database nearly full 95 Y Y 6162 MFP access error Scan Log near full 90 Used S...

Page 590: ...ssage Log near full 95 Used Message log database nearly full 95 Y Y 6192 MFP access error Message Log near full 90 Used Message log database nearly full 90 Y Y 6193 MFP access error Message Log near full 80 Used Message log database nearly full 80 Y Y 6194 MFP access error Message Log near full 70 Used Message log database nearly full 70 Y Y 61B0 MFP access error Failed to save Image Log data Imag...

Page 591: ... is not pursuant to Security Policy An e Filing box password is outside the security policy 6260 MFP access error User Information updated User information change 6261 MFP access error Role Information updated Role information change 6262 MFP access error Role in Group is edited Group role information change 6263 MFP access error Failed to add the new build in user or role New build in user and ro...

Page 592: ...ta installation failure Y Y 7117 Maintenance error Failed to update Reversing Automatic Document Feeder ROM DF firmware installation failure Y Y 7119 Maintenance error Failed to update PFC ROM PFC firmware installation failure Y Y 711A Maintenance error Cleared License Key Electronic key clear Y Y 711C Maintenance error Successfully removed License Key Electronic key returning success Y Y 711D Mai...

Page 593: ...enance error Failed to update Finisher ROM Finisher firmware installation failure Y Y 71B6 Maintenance error Successfully updated Saddle ROM Saddle firmware installation failure Y Y 71B7 Maintenance error Failed to update Saddle ROM Saddle firmware installation failure Y Y 71B8 Maintenance error Successfully updated Punch ROM Punch firmware installation success Y Y 71B9 Maintenance error Failed to...

Page 594: ...k Address book delivery success Y Y 7221 Maintenance error Failed to synchronize AddressBook Address book delivery failure Y Y 7222 Maintenance error Failed to synchronize AddressBook for some Slave MFP Some address book delivery failure Y Y 7230 Maintenance error Added new Project Code Project creation Y Y 7231 Maintenance error Edited Project Code Project edition Y Y 7232 Maintenance error Remov...

Page 595: ...lication An application is uninstalled Y Y 7303 Maintenance error Failed to uninstall Application Uninstallation of an application fails Y Y 7304 Maintenance error Successfully updated Application An application is updated Y Y 7305 Maintenance error Failed to update Application Updating of an application fails Y Y 7311 Maintenance error Failed to start Application Start of an application fails Y Y...

Page 596: ...rved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 58 7331 Maintenance error The time limit of the application license expired The validity date of the license for an application has expired Y Y Error code Classification Message Contents Error code display media Troubles hooting Panl JL ML Noti Cf Pjl ...

Page 597: ...on failure to an authentication server and a switch Y Y 8024 Network error Certificate verification Failure Failure in verification of certification Y Y 8031 Network error No IKE proposal chosen Ipsec error for IKEv1 certification failure Y Y 8032 Network error IKE Certificate Authentication failed Ipsec error for wrong proposal selection Y Y 8033 Network error IKE Pre shared key Authentication fa...

Page 598: ...42 Network error Authentication Method mismatch Ipsec error for authentication method inconsistency Y Y 8043 Network error IKE Version mismatch Ipsec error for version inconsistency Y Y 8044 Network error Encapsulation mode mismatch Ipsec error for encapsulation inconsistency Y Y 8045 Network error Peer IP Address mismatch Ipsec error for peer ip inconsistency Y Y 8046 Network error Local IP Addre...

Page 599: ...key file for SIG 0 or TSIG is invalid Y Y 8101 Network error Wireless association with Access point failure Wireless connection in the Access point failure Y Y 8102 Network error Unable to contact Access point Connection of MFP to the Access point with a specified SSID failure Y Y 8103 Network error Certificate verification Failure Wireless certificate verification failure Y Y 8121 Network error D...

Page 600: ...he server and the MFP Y Y 8129 Network error Active Directory Domain Kerberos Ticket has expired and cannot be used for Authentication Active directory domain Expired Kerberos ticket cannot be used for authentication Y Y 812A Network error Active Directory Domain Verification of the Ticket has failed Active directory domain Kerberos ticket authentication failure Y Y 812B Network error Active Direc...

Page 601: ...2 Information Paper Feeding Cover Open Please Close Cover Paper feed cover of the equipment Y Y Y D204 Information Lower Side Cover Open Please Close Cover Tandem LCF cover taking off of the LCF large capacitor feeder Y Y Y D205 Information Lower Side Cover Open Please Close Cover Paper feed cover of the PFP side cover Y Y Y D206 Information Automatic Duplexing Unit Cover Open Please Close Cover A...

Page 602: ...on Non genuine toner K Y Y D312 Information Non genuine toner C Y Y D313 Information Non genuine toner M Y Y D314 Information Non genuine toner Y Y Y D321 Information Toner K nearly empty Y Y D322 Information Toner C nearly empty Y Y D323 Information Toner M nearly empty Y Y D324 Information Toner Y nearly empty Y Y D32E Information Waste toner boxe nearly full Y Y D341 Information Black Toner Emp...

Page 603: ... Y Y D368 Information New unit was installed EPU2 M replacement completion Y Y D369 Information New unit was installed EPU2 Y replacement completion Y Y D401 Information Close Drawer 1 Drawer 1 upper drawer open eB2 Y Y Y D402 Information Close Drawer 2 Drawer 2 lower drawer open eB2 Y Y Y D403 Information Close Drawer 3 Drawer 3 PFP upper drawer open eB2 Y Y Y D404 Information Close Drawer 4 Draw...

Page 604: ...e Automatic Document Feeder ADF installation removal Y Y Y D7B0 Information Add Remove Fax Unit Line1 Fax line1 installation removal Y Y Y D7B1 Information Add Remove Fax Unit Line2 Fax line2 installation removal Y Y Y D7E0 Information Add Remove Coin Controller Coin controller installation removal Y Y Y D7E1 Information Add Remove Key Copy Counter Key counter installation removal Y Y Y D800 Infor...

Page 605: ...N 16K R O 16K P Envelope COM10 Q Envelope DL R Envelope Monarch S Envelope lengthwise No 3 T Envelope lengthwise No 4 U Unused V Unused Z Not selected C Sort mode staple mode 0 Non sort Non staple 1 Group 2 Sort 7 Front staple 8 Double staple 9 Rear staple A Saddle stitch B Center fold D ADF mode 0 Unused 1 AUTO FEED SADF 2 STACK FEED E APS AMS mode 0 Not selected 1 APS 2 AMS F Duplex mode Copy 0 ...

Page 606: ...isplay in hexadecimal Mx256 Mx16 M O Mode 0 Auto color 1 Full color 2 Black 3 Unused 4 Unused 5 Gray scale 6 Unused 7 Unused P Media type 0 Plain paper 1 Thick 1 2 Thick 2 3 Thick 3 4 Thick 4 5 Special paper 1 6 Special paper 2 7 Recycled paper 8 Plain paper 1 9 Plain paper 2 A Thin paper B OHP film C Thick 1 reverse D Thick 2 reverse E Thick 3 reverse F Thick 4 reverse G Special paper 1 reverse H...

Page 607: ...t on the sensor Check that the actuator is correctly operated Connector check Check that the connector is not disconnected Check that the pins are not deformed and do not come off Disconnect and reconnect the connector Harness check Check if the harnesses are open circuited Motor check Check the motor in the test mode Check that there is no abnormality in the driving section Check that there is no...

Page 608: ...d is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the exit sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the registration roller clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 108 158 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the registration roller clutch is dis...

Page 609: ... Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the registration sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Are the high speed low speed clutches working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 203 205 Yes 4 No Check ...

Page 610: ...CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the registration sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the bypass feed clutch ADU clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 204 222 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the b...

Page 611: ...ected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 1st transport sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Are the high speed low speed transport clutches working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 203 205 Yes 4 No Check if the connectors of the high speed low speed ...

Page 612: ...rcuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 2nd transport sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the PFP transport clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 225 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected Check if any of the connectors CN241 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected Check if ...

Page 613: ...s the ADU entrance sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 1 D Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the MOT board and LGC board are short circuited or open ...

Page 614: ...357 457 507 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board and MOT board is short circuited or open circuited e STUDIO206L 256 306 207L 257 307 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board and MOT2 board is short circuited or open circuited e STUDIO356 456 506 357 457 507 Replace the exit motor Replace the MOT bo...

Page 615: ...sconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited or open circuited Replace the ADU exit sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the ADU motor working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 119 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected Check if the connector CN402 and CN404 on the MOT MOT2 board is disconnect...

Page 616: ... C Yes 3 No Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited between the reverse sensor and the connector CN304 on the LGC board Correct if there is any abnormality Replace the reverse sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the reverse motor working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 123 173 Yes Check the exit roller Replace it if it is worn out No Check if the...

Page 617: ...eck item Result Measure Next Step 1 ADU Open the ADU and remove paper if there is any on the transport path 2 2 Is the registration sensor working Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 9 A Yes Check the rollers Replace them if they are worn out No 3 3 LGC board 1 Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected 2 Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circu...

Page 618: ...LGC board 1 Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected 2 Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited 3 Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 4 Replace the 1st transport sensor 5 Replace the LGC board 5 LGC board registration sensor 1 Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected...

Page 619: ...n the LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 4 Replace the registration sensor 5 Replace the LGC board Parts to be replaced Remark Registration sensor LGC board Rollers on the transport path Proce dure Check item Result Measure Next Step 1 Feed cover Open the feed cover and remove paper if there is any on the transport path 2 2 Is the 2nd transport sensor working Perform the input check 0...

Page 620: ... the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 6 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector CN316 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the registration sensor Replace the LGC...

Page 621: ...ut check in the test mode 03 226 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected Check if any of the connectors CN241 and CN247 on the PFP board is disconnected Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are ...

Page 622: ...ard is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 1st registration sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the ADU clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 222 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected Check if the...

Page 623: ...attern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 1st transport sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the bypass feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 204 Is the bypass paper sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 1 D Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass paper sensor are disconnected Check if ...

Page 624: ...ted and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 1st transport sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the upper drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 201 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is...

Page 625: ...arnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the 2nd transport sensor Replace the LGC board 3 Is the lower drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 202 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is disconnected...

Page 626: ...if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor Replace the PFP board Replace the LGC board 3 Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 226 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected Check if any of the connectors CN241 and ...

Page 627: ...e harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor Replace the PFP board Replace the LGC board 3 Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 228 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected Chec...

Page 628: ...508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 90 LGC board PFP lower drawer feed clutch PFP lower drawer feed roller Separation roller Pickup roller Parts to be replaced Remark ...

Page 629: ...cuited Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited Replace the LCF feed sensor Replace the LCF board Replace the LGC board 3 Is the LCF feed clutch working Perform the output check in the test mode 03 209 Yes 4 No Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected Check if any of the connectors CN1 and CN6 on the LCF board is disc...

Page 630: ...s disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the front cover opening closing switch Replace the LGC board 3 Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 2 A Yes 4 No Check if the connec...

Page 631: ... 03 FAX OFF 2 A Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening closing switch is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board ar...

Page 632: ...ning closing switch working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 9 F Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the ADU opening closing switch is disconnected Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the LGC board are short circuited or open circuited Repl...

Page 633: ...detection sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 9 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the feed cover opening closing detection sensor is disconnected Check if the connector CN311 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open ci...

Page 634: ...e 03 FAX OFF 4 B Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening closing switch is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN1 or CN7 on the LCF board is disconnected Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are s...

Page 635: ...e input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 E e STUDIO206L 256 306 207L 257 307 03 FAX ON 4 E e STUDIO356 456 506 357 457 507 Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the bridge unit opening closing switch is disconnected Check if the connector CN302 CN400 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on t...

Page 636: ...k in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the JSP cover switch is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the JSP board is disconnected Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the JSP board and LGC board are sh...

Page 637: ...k in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 E Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the OCT cover switch is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN261 on the OCT board is disconnected Check if the connector CN302 on the OCT board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor patterns on the OCT board and LGC board are sh...

Page 638: ...ed Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replace the sensor Replace the LGC board 3 LGC board Replace the LGC board Parts to be replaced Remark Sensor Refer to the following table LGC board Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode Input check Registration area Automatic duple...

Page 639: ...ed at the first sheet of paper when the drawer is opened or closed or when the power of the equipment is turned ON Classification Error content Other jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path Proce dure Check item Result Measure Next Step 1 Open the cover of the unit area whose picture is blinking on the control panel Is there any paper on the transport path Yes Remove the paper No 2 2 Is the ...

Page 640: ...ed sensor 03 FAX OFF 2 B PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03 FAX OFF 3 B Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor 1 03 FAX ON 4 G 03 FAX ON 3 G Bridge unit transport sensor 2 03 FAX ON 4 F 03 FAX ON 3 G JSP JSP cover JSP feed sensor 03 FAX ON 3 G OCT OCT cover OCT feed sensor 03 FAX ON 3 G Finisher Finisher door Sensors in the finisher Classification Error content Other jam Paper remaining...

Page 641: ...ance sensor 03 SCAN ON 3 H Bypass unit Duplexing unit Bypass feed sensor 03 SCAN ON 3 A Feeding area equipment Paper feed cover 4th drawer transport sensor 03 SCAN ON 1 A 3rd drawer tandem LCF transport sensor 03 SCAN ON 1 B 2nd drawer transport sensor 03 SCAN ON 1 C LCF LCF side cover Option LCF feed sensor 03 SCAN ON 5 E Bridge unit Front cover Bridge unit path exit sensor 03 ALL OFF 1 A 03 SCAN...

Page 642: ...en back ON HDD Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited SYS board Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited Replace parts Remarks HDD SYS board Classification Error content Other jam Print end command time out jam Proce dure Check item Result Measure Next Step 1 Is t...

Page 643: ...ained Original registration sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 H Connector check CN74 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN74 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Original registration sensor RADF board Pickup roller Replace it if it is worn out Feed roller Replace it if it is worn out Separation roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error c...

Page 644: ... G Connector check CN76 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN76 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Read sensor RADF board Registration roller Replace it if it is worn out Read roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content RADF jam Jam not reaching the original exit reverse sensor during scanning Check item Measures Read roller Clean the read roller if it...

Page 645: ...ut check 03 FAX ON 7 H Connector check CN74 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN74 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Registration sensor RADF board Registration roller Replace it if it is worn out Classification Error content RADF jam Stop jam at the read sensor Check item Measures Read roller Clean the registration roller if it is stained Read sensor Sensor check Perfor...

Page 646: ...ck Switching power supply Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal Board check Connector check Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF board SLG board Switching regulator Classification Error content RADF jam Stop jam at the exit sensor Check item Measures Exit roller Clean the registration roller if it is stained Exit sensor Sensor check Perform the input ch...

Page 647: ...t check 03 FAX ON 7 C Connector check CN8 Harness check RADF board Board check Connector check CN8 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF jam access cover switch RADF board Classification Error content RADF jam RADF open jam Check item Measures RADF Close the RADF if it is opened Remove if there is any original before closing it RADF opening closing sensor Sensor check Perform the input ch...

Page 648: ...ntent RADF jam Cover open jam in the read ready status MR 3021 3022 Check item Measures RADF jam access cover Front cover Close the RADF jam access cover or the front cover if they are opened in the read ready status RADF jam access cover sensor Sensor check Perform the input check 03 FAX ON 7 C Connector check CN75 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF jam access cover sensor RADF board ...

Page 649: ... the bridge unit transport sensor 1 entrance sensor or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the connector J681 of the bridge unit is disconnected Correct if any 2 Replace the bridge unit transport sensor 1 3 Replace the LGC board 3 Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working Perform the output check 03 232 Yes 4 No 1 Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge u...

Page 650: ... the bridge unit transport sensor 2 working Perform the input check 03 FAX OFF 3 G 03 FAX OFF 4 G Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connector CN334 on the LGC board is disconnected from the bridge unit transport sensor 2 exit sensor or the harnesses are open circuited Check if the connector J523 of the bridge unit is disconnected Correct if any 2 Replace the bridge unit transport sensor 2 3 Replace the LGC ...

Page 651: ...the paper No 2 2 Is the JSP feed sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 D Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the JSP feed sensor is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN262 on the JSP board is disconnected Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited ...

Page 652: ...he paper No 2 2 Is the OCT feed sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX ON 3 G Yes 3 No Check if the connector of the OCT feed sensor is disconnected Check if either of the connectors CN260 or CN262 on the OCT board is disconnected Check if the connector CN302 on the LGC board is disconnected Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited C...

Page 653: ...specified time when the punch motor M15 is rotated The punch shaft home position sensor S35 and the punch shaft rotational direction sensor S34 do not specify the home position or the rotational direction correspondingly during initialization or initialization is not finished at a turning ON point for the punch shaft home position sensor S35 Probable cause Checking and measures Punch motor M15 abn...

Page 654: ...nd within the range of 5V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Hole punch control PC board HP CN3 CN6 Hole punch control PC board HP abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing...

Page 655: ... SOL2 and the finisher control PC board CN22 disconnected or open circuited Parts to be replaced Remark Entrance sensor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Paper jam in finisher section Transport delay jam paper not inserted Check item Measures Removing paper Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Feedin...

Page 656: ...r content Paper jam in finisher section Paper transport delay jam Check item Measures Transport sensor Sensor check Connector check S2 Harness check Finisher controller PC board Board check CN22 Parts to be replaced Remark Transport sensor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if...

Page 657: ...C board FIN CN14 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the motor and the connector exchange the finisher control PC board FIN Classification Error content Finisher jam Finisher section Paper transport delay jam Probable cause Checking and measures Transport motor 1 M1 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity i...

Page 658: ...ntrance sensor Sensor check S1 Connector check CN7 CN22 Harness check Transport sensor Sensor check S2 Connector check CN7 CN22 Harness check Parts to be replaced Remark Entrance sensor Transport sensor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher or on the transport path of the equipment and remove it if there is Entrance sensor S1 Sensor c...

Page 659: ... Sensor check Connector check Harness check Transport sensor S2 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Processing tray sensor S12 Sensor check Connector check Harness check Paper holding cam Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holding cam is rotated Assist arm motor M10 Motor check Connector check Harness check Buffer tray guide Open and close the buffer tray guide If there is any m...

Page 660: ...hat the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Gripper arm exit sensor S26 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP27 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If...

Page 661: ...Measure the voltage on TP86 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Middle path sensor S7 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP84 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or ...

Page 662: ...nd connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN6 CN14 CN22 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector replace the finisher control PC board FIN Classification Error content Paper jam in finisher secti...

Page 663: ...or Entrance path sensor S19 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP86 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Sub path sensor S8 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP85 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then chec...

Page 664: ...ontrol PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN ...

Page 665: ...shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN1 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector exchange ...

Page 666: ... if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN5 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector exchange the finisher control PC board FIN Probable cause Checking and measures Finishing tray sensor S2 abnormality Measure th...

Page 667: ... the voltage on TP12 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Front cover switch SW1 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP77 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower ...

Page 668: ...ange of 3 3V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the staple unit Staple unit staple empty sensor S18 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP24 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 3 3V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the s...

Page 669: ...sport motor M5 and the finisher control PC board CN10 disconnected or open circuited Parts to be replaced Remark Stack belt exit home position sensor Stack transport motor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Stack belt exit home position sensor Check if there is a disconnection of the connector incorrect installation or breakage of the stack belt exit home position sensor S9 If there ...

Page 670: ...s disconnected or the harnesses are open circuited Correct if any Check if the stitcher home position switches are working properly Parts to be replaced Remark Stitcher home position switch Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Paper jam in saddle stitcher section Door open jam Check item Measures Finisher Check if there is any paper in the finisher saddle stitcher or on the tr...

Page 671: ...rness check Transport path 2 S27 Sensor check S27 Connector check CN20 Harness check Transport path 3 S28 Sensor check S28 Connector check CN20 Harness check Ejecting roller sensor S29 Sensor check S29 Connector check CN20 Harness check Interface PC board I F Board check Connector check CN1 CN2 CN5 CN7 CN8 Harness check Saddle stitcher controller board Board check Connector check CN10 CN13 CN20 Ha...

Page 672: ...ck that the gap between the transfer guide surface and the upper surface of the flapper tip is in the acceptable range according to the status of the transport path switching solenoid SOL5 solenoid OFF 1 5 to 2 1 mm solenoid ON 2 3 to 2 9 mm If it is not adjust it Entrance motor M1 Motor check M1 Connector check CN26 Harness check Transport path switching solenoid SOL9 Solenoid check SOL9 Connecto...

Page 673: ...erminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connectors Finisher control PC board FIN CN13 CN1 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the motor sensor and connectors exchange the finisher control PC board FIN Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle stitcher section Short paper jam in Saddle Stitch Finisher Check item Measures Fin...

Page 674: ...Check item Result Measure Next Step 1 Is the finisher working Yes Replace the finisher controller PC board No 2 2 Are the versions of the Finisher Saddle Stitch Finisher and converter firmware the latest Yes Download the firmware in the latest version No 3 3 Check if the voltage 24V is being supplied to the finisher Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board Check if the harness connectin...

Page 675: ...e the voltage on pin CN10 8 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Gripper arm exit sensor S26 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP27 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is ...

Page 676: ...ror Check item Measures Sideways adjustment motor Rotate sideways adjustment motor and fix its mechanism if it does not rotate smoothly sideways deviation HP sensor Sideways adjustment motor Hole punch control PC board Check if the connectors on the hole punch controller PC board HP board are disconnected from the sideways deviation HP sensor S3 and the sideways adjustment motor or the harnesses a...

Page 677: ... correctly or replace it Check if the connector CN12 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the shutter opening closing sensor S4 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Shutter clutch Check if the connector CN10 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the shutter clutch CLT1 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Parts to be replaced Remar...

Page 678: ... sensor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error content Finisher jam Rear alignment plate home position error Check item Measures Rear alignment plate Move the Rear alignment plate If there is any mechanical problem fix its mechanism Rear alignment motor Rear alignment plate home position sensor Finisher controller PC board Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are ...

Page 679: ... there is any mechanical problem fix its mechanism Paddle home position sensor Paddle motor Finisher controller PC board Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the paddle home position sensor S3 and the paddle motor M8 or the harnesses are open circuited Correct if any Parts to be replaced Remark Paddle motor Paddle home position sensor Finisher controlle...

Page 680: ...ller PC board Check if the connectors on the finisher controller PC board are disconnected from the buffer tray home position sensor S5 and the buffer tray guide motor M3 or the harnesses are open circuited Correct if any Parts to be replaced Remark Buffer tray guide motor Buffer tray home position sensor Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Buffer tray guide Open and close the buffer ...

Page 681: ... check Saddle controller board Connector check Board check Parts to be replaced Remark Buffer tray home position sensor Buffer tray guide motor Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section Front stapling is not correctly done Check item Measures Finisher Is there any paper remaining on the paper transport path in the Finisher or the equipment or on the finishing tr...

Page 682: ...pler drive unit Unit check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN3 Board check Replace parts Remarks Rear saddle stapler drive unit Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section The paper holder home position cannot be detected Check item Measures Finisher Is there any mechanical problem when the paper holding cam is rotated Paper h...

Page 683: ...at the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connectors Finisher control PC board FIN CN15 CN16 Finisher control PC bo...

Page 684: ...ector check Harness check Stacker motor M14 Motor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN4 Board check Replace parts Remarks Stacker home position sensor S33 Stacker motor M14 Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section The folding blade home position cannot be detected Check item Measures Folding blade cam Is there any mecha...

Page 685: ...sor check Connector check Harness check Additional folding motor M20 Motor check Connector check Harness check Saddle controller board Connector check CN18 CN19 Board check Replace parts Remarks Additional folding home position sensor S39 Additional folding motor M20 Saddle controller board Classification Error item Finisher jam Saddle section Fold processed paper cannot be transported to the addi...

Page 686: ...shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Finisher control PC board FIN CN15 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the sensor and the connector exchange...

Page 687: ... pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the main motor 6 Replace the LGC board 2 Are there any damage or scratches on the main motor board Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 2 Check if the conductor pat...

Page 688: ...if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 6 Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 7 Replace the PFP motor 8 Replace the PFP board 9 Replace the LGC board 2 Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flickering Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses ...

Page 689: ...r pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open circuited 4 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 5 Replace the LGC board 2 Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 6 B 7 B Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected 2 Check if the connector CN315 on the LGC board is disconnected 3 Check ...

Page 690: ...are open circuited 5 Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the PFP board 7 Replace the LGC board 2 Is the tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 2 D 3 D Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN241 CN247 and CN248 on the PFP board is...

Page 691: ...uited 6 Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 7 Replace the LCF board 2 Are the LCF tray bottom sensor and LCF tray up sensor working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 5 A 5 B Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected 2 Check if any of the connectors CN1 CN2 and CN6 on the LCF board is disconn...

Page 692: ...the LCF board and LGC board are short circuited or open circuited 6 Replace the LCF board 7 Replace the LGC board 2 Are the LCF end fence home stop position sensors working Perform the input check in the test mode 03 FAX OFF 5 D 5 C Yes 3 No 1 Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected 2 Check if either of the connectors CN1 or CN4 on the LCF board is disconnected 3 heck if the connec...

Page 693: ...rcuited 3 Check if the PLL lock signal CN3 10 output from the LCF board is always L level 4 Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103 17 is always L level 5 Replace the LCF transport motor 6 Replace the LCF board 7 Replace the LGC board 3 LCF transport motor LCF board LGC board 1 Check if the connector of the LCF transport motor is disconnected 2 Check if the connecto...

Page 694: ... harness is connected properly to the connector of the inverter board or the LED board 3 When the carriage is driven check if the harness interferes with it or parts are caught in it CCD board Lens unit 1 Check if the connector of the CCD board is connected properly 2 Check if the CCD board is installed properly Check that the lens unit is not tilted or the screw is securely tighten SLG board 1 Ch...

Page 695: ... Notes Do not turn the mirror adjustment screw more than necessary Carriage 1 Check if the carriage is tilted by moving it to the left stopping point 2 Check if the wire fixing screw is loosened 3 Check if the movement of the carriage is unstable due to disengagement of the carriage roller Exposure lamp 1 Check if the exposure lamp is flickering when it is turned on 2 Check if the connector is pro...

Page 696: ... on the SYS board is abnormal 2 Check if the harness CN130 on the SYS board has any scratch on it or is open circuited or caught anywhere 3 Replace the harness CN130 on the SYS board Parts to be replaced Remark LED lamp unit Lens unit SYS board Harness Classification Error content Scanning system related service call Peak detection error the light source is extremely light Proce dure Check item Me...

Page 697: ...utput from IC9 Check if 1 8V is output from IC11 5 Replace the Lens unit 2 SYS board 1 Check if the connector is properly connected all the way in the SYS board 2 Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts mounted on the SYS board 3 Check if 5V is output to the SYS board 4 Replace the SYS board 3 Harnesses 1 Check if the harness has any scratch on it or is open circuited or caugh...

Page 698: ...Scan motor 1 Check if the belt tension is loosened 2 Check if the motor fixing screw is loosened 3 Check if the carriage wire and the timing belt come off 4 Check if the connector is connected to the motor properly 5 Check if the harness of the motor is caught or open circuited 5 Setting Clear the SRAM data by starting the equipment in the 3C mode and initialize them in the 08 mode Refer to P 9 25...

Page 699: ...ss SYS board 1 Check if the harness CN127 of the carriage home position sensor is connected properly 2 Check if there is any abnormality in the parts mounted on the SYS board 3 Check if 24V on the SYS board is short circuited 4 Check if 24V is supplied to the SYS board 5 Check if there is any abnormality in the parts mounted on the SYS board 6 Replace the SYS board Scan motor 1 Check if the belt t...

Page 700: ... position sensor 1 Check if the harness is properly connected to the sensor 2 Check if the harness is caught or open circuited 3 SLG board 1 Check if the harness of the carriage home position sensor is connected properly 2 Check if the mounted parts on the SLG board are damaged or abnormal 3 Check if 24 V on the SLG board is short circuited 4 Check if 24 V is supplied to the SLG board 4 Scan motor...

Page 701: ...f there is any abnormality in the parts mounted on the SYS board 3 Check if 24V capacitor C303 on the SYS board is short circuited 4 Check if 24V capacitor C303 is supplied to the SYS board 5 Check if there is any abnormality in the parts mounted on the SYS board 6 Replace the SYS board Scan motor 1 Check if the belt tension is loosened 2 Check if the motor fixing screw is loosened 3 Check if the ...

Page 702: ...because the signal for checking 24V on the SLG board is abnormal 1 Check if 3V is input in 35 Pin of the scanner CPU IC10 2 Check if the mounted parts on the SLG board are damaged or abnormal 3 Check if 24V on the SLG board is short circuited 4 Check if 24V is supplied to the SLG board No 1 Check if the supply harness is connected properly to the connector 2 Check if 24V and SG on the SLG board ar...

Page 703: ...cause the 24V check signal on the SYS board is abnormal 1 Check if there is any abnormality in the parts mounted on the SYS board 2 Check if 3V is input in Pin 35 of the scanner CPU IC15 of the SYS board 3 Replace the SYS board No 1 Check if the supply harness CN130 is connected properly 2 Check if 24V and SG on the SYS board are short circuited 3 Check if the power supply is not short circuited b...

Page 704: ...cted to the connector J451 on the EPU board has any abnormality Parts to be replaced Remark EPU memory board LGC board Classification Error content Process related service call EPU board memory new parts detection error Check item Measure Process unit 1 If the process unit has been replaced with a new one before the equipment is started turn the power OFF and then back ON in the EPU replacement mo...

Page 705: ...ocess related service call Temperature humidity sensor abnormality Check Item Result Measure Is the connector CN317 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature humidity sensor disconnected Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature humidity sensor disconnected Yes 1 Connect the connector securely Replace the harness No 1 Replace the temperature humidity sensor 2 Replace the ...

Page 706: ...tern on the LGC board is open or short circuited 3 Check if the connector CN309 is disconnected 4 Harness 1 Check the harness connecting the LGC board and the CTIF board 2 Check the connectors CN308 at the LGC board and CN150 at the CTIF board Parts to be replaced Remark Toner cartridge CTIF board LGC board Harness Classification Contents Process related service call High voltage transformer abnor...

Page 707: ... are not deformed or dirty 4 Check if the harnesses of the center side and edge thermistors are open circuited 2 Check the heater 1 Check if the heater is broken 2 Check if the connector of the heater is disconnected 3 Check if the harnesses are connected properly to the terminals of the heater lamp 4 Check if the thermostat is blown 3 Check the LGC board 1 Check if the connectors CN308 are discon...

Page 708: ...f the heater lamp 4 Check if the thermostat is blown 5 Check the LGC board 1 Check if the connectors CN308 are disconnected 2 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 3 Replace the LGC board 6 Clear the status counter After repairing the matter which caused the error perform the following 1 Turn ON the power while 0 and 8 are pressed simultaneously 2 Key...

Page 709: ...pressing the fuser unit with your hand Using a driver is recommended to fix the fuser unit 2 Check if the grounding leaf spring in the fuser unit is in contact due to deformation Fig 8 2 5 Check the power supply Replace the switching regulator 6 Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value 08 2002 4 to 0 for C430 and 5 7 or 9 to 0 for C440 taking the same procedure as that for ...

Page 710: ...edge thermistors are disconnected 2 Check if the center side and edge thermistors contact the surface of the fuser roller properly 3 Check if the center side and edge thermistors are deformed or dirty 4 Check if the harnesses of the center side and edge thermistors are open circuited 4 Check the heater 1 Check if the heater is broken Check that the heater is conducted properly 2 Check if the conne...

Page 711: ...eck the power supply Replace the switching regulator 5 Clear the status counter 1 Change the value of the status counter 08 2002 to 0 7 or 8 is written in 08 2002 Parts to be replaced Remark LGC board Thermistors Heater lamp Classification Error content Fuser unit related service call The fusing temperature is above 240 degrees C Check item Measure 1 Check the thermistors 1 Check if the connectors...

Page 712: ...ge thermistor is open circuited 2 Check the LGC board 1 Check if the connector CN308 is disconnected 2 Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited 3 Replace the LGC board 3 Clear the status counter 1 Turn ON the power while 0 and 8 are pressed simultaneously 2 Key in 2002 then press START 3 Change the current status counter value 6 and 10 to 0 then press OK or ...

Page 713: ...lear the status counter 1 Change the value of the status counter 08 2002 to 0 62 is written in 08 2002 Parts to be replaced Remark LGC board Thermistors Classification Error content Fuser unit related service call Fusing error counter for out of specifications Check item Measure 1 Check the LGC board 1 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is open or short circuited 2 Check if the memory...

Page 714: ...ck SYS board e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 Check if the conductor pattern on the SYS board is short circuited or open circuited Connector check Parts to be replaced Remark RADF board SLG board e STUDIO206L 256 306 356 456 506 SYS board e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 Classification Error content Optional communication related service call Document feeder model detection error Check item Measur...

Page 715: ...onnecting the CNV board and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the CNV board is short circuited or open circuited Finisher controller PC board Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short circuited or open circuited Parts to be replaced Remark CNV board Finisher controller PC board Classification Error...

Page 716: ... Timing of detection Optional communication related service call No response is received in a control line from the Hole Punch Unit in the specified time during communication determination using control lines at power ON Three consecutive transmission retries failed after a data reception error was detected No response is received in a control line in the specified time after data transmission fro...

Page 717: ...C board Classification Contents Circuit related service call SRAM abnormality on the SYS board Check Item Measure 1 Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode 08 2 When SRAM REQUIRES INITIALIZATION is displayed on the LCD check the destination and then press the START button If the destination is not correct key in the correct one and then press the START button 3 After the confirmation mess...

Page 718: ... Combination of the firmware version Check the combination of the firmware version of the system ROM engine ROM and scanner ROM Reinstall the scanner ROM firmware Replacement part Remark SLG board Classification Contents Circuit related service call SYS HDD cooling fan abnormality Check Item Measure SYS HDD cooling fan Check if the fan is rotating properly If not check if any foreign object is adh...

Page 719: ... disconnected or open circuited 1 CN131 e STUDIO206L 256 306 356 456 506 CN103 e STUDIO207L 257 307 357 457 507 Parts to be replaced Remark SYS board LGC board Classification Error content Communication related service call Communication error between system CPU and scanner CPU Scanner response abnormality Check item Measure Reproducibility Turn the power OFF and then back ON using the main power ...

Page 720: ...tical unit Reconnect it securely if so Even if the connector is not apparently disconnected it may be connected loosely Therefore check carefully that it is secure 2 Check if the harness is open circuited and the connector pin is disconnected 3 Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited 4 Replace the laser optical unit 5 Replace the LGC board Parts to be r...

Page 721: ...en circuited or short circuited Update the finisher firmware Converter Check if the connector connecting the converter board and the LGC board on the equipment is disconnected or open circuited Check if the conductor pattern on the converter PC board is open circuited or short circuited Update the converter firmware Parts to be replaced Remark Converter board Finisher control PC board Error Timing...

Page 722: ...not rotating or the buffer tray guide is not moving normally Check Item Measure Buffer tray guide If there is mechanical problem when the buffer tray guide is opened closed while the buffer roller is lifted up fix the mechanism Buffer tray guide motor M3 Check the connectors and harnesses between the buffer tray guide motor M3 and the finisher control PC board CN18 Replacement part Measure Buffer ...

Page 723: ...heck Item Measure Buffer roller Rotate the buffer roller Fix any mechanical problem Buffer roller drive motor Check if the connector CN11 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the buffer roller drive motor M4 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Replacement part Measure Buffer roller drive motor Finisher controller PC board Classification Error item Finisher relate...

Page 724: ...sm Movable tray shift motor M7 Check the connectors and harnesses between the movable tray shift motor M7 and the finisher control PC board CN8 Movable tray position A B and C sensors S13 S14 and S15 Connector check Sensor check Replacement part Measure Movable tray shift motor M7 Movable tray position A B and C sensors S13 S14 and S15 Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Movable tray ...

Page 725: ...ol PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity among the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connectors Finisher control PC board FIN CN4 C...

Page 726: ...sensor S17 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP28 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Movable tray middle sensor S18 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP29 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check tha...

Page 727: ...ver is moved to the paper detection position Probable cause Checking and measures Exiting paper holding solenoid SOL1 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the solenoid Paper holding home position sensor S12 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP13 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V o...

Page 728: ...this sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned OFF after the rear alignment motor M3 has been driven at the specified number of pulse The turning ON of the rear alignment plate home position sensor S6 is not detected when the rear alignment plate is moved from a point where this sensor is turned OFF to one point where this sensor is turned ON after the rear alignment motor M3 ha...

Page 729: ...the motor Rear alignment plate home position sensor S10 abnormality Measure the voltage on pin CN9 9 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between ...

Page 730: ...ion sensor S16 abnormality Measure the voltage on CN16 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the sensor is ON and within the range of 3 3V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the staple unit Staple unit improper clinching prevention sensor S15 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP25 on the finisher contr...

Page 731: ...sured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Edge staple unit interference switch SW3 abnormality Measure the voltage on pin CN18 8 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when the switch is ON and within the range of 24V 10 when...

Page 732: ...le unit is moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is turned OFF after the staple unit sliding motor M7 has been driven at the specified number of pulse The turning ON of the staple unit sliding home position sensor S3 is not detected when the staple unit is moved from a point where this sensor is turned OFF to one point where this sensor is turned ON after...

Page 733: ...or Saddle stitch staple unit sliding home position sensor S22 abnormality Measure the voltage on pin CN7 10 on the finisher control PC board FIN Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Edge staple unit improper clinching prevention sensor S25 abnorma...

Page 734: ...heck Item Measure Main power switch Turn OFF the main power switch then back ON Replacement part Measure Finisher controller PC board Timing of detection EEPROM Data readout check is performed after data writing and the result of the data readout check does not conform to the written data The equipment does not enter the ready status after the specified time has passed from data writing Probable c...

Page 735: ...ole punch RAM check mode is not normal replace the hole punch control PC board HP Classification Contents Finisher related service call Flash ROM abnormality Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON Check Item Measure Main power switch Turn OFF the main power switch then back ON Finisher controller PC board Board check Replacement part M...

Page 736: ...ng blade motor clock sensor S24 is not changed for the specified time when the paper folding blade motor M12 is driven Probable cause Checking and measures Paper folding blade motor M12 abnormality Check if the electrical continuity of the coil is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the motor Paper folding blade motor clock sensor S24 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP66 on the finis...

Page 737: ...n circuited or short circuited Replace parts Remarks Saddle controller PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call Saddle Stitch Finisher RAM abnormality Check item Measures Reboot Is the error recovered when the power of the equipment is turned OFF and then back ON Replace parts Remarks Saddle controller PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call The CB9...

Page 738: ...DL Connector check CN18 Board check Replace parts Remarks Saddle transport motor Saddle control PC board Classification Error item Finisher related service call The CB95 error also occurs when the error EF16 has occurred consecutively for 3 times Check item Measures Stacker carrier Is there any mechanical problem when the stacker carrier is moved Stacker motor M14 Motor check Connector check Harne...

Page 739: ...ved fix the mechanism Side alignment motor M15 Harness check Saddle control PC board SDL Connector check CN7 Board check Replacement part Measure Side alignment motor M15 Saddle control PC board SDL Error Timing of detection Saddle stitch alignment motor Saddle stitch alignment plate home position sensor The turning OFF of the saddle stitch alignment plate home position sensor S20 is not detected ...

Page 740: ...titch finisher folding motor Check Item Measure Folding motor encoder sensor S34 Sensor check S34 Connector check Harness check Side alignment motor M15 Harness check Saddle control PC board SDL Connector check CN11 CN14 Board check Replacement part Measure Folding motor encoder sensor S34 Side alignment motor M15 Saddle control PC board SDL Error Timing of detection Stacker motor Stacker home pos...

Page 741: ...er nip home position sensor S8 does not become OFF from ON in the specified time when the status in which the exit roller nip is large or small is changed to one in which the exit roller or the middle transport roller is released The exit roller nip home position sensor S8 does not become ON from OFF in the specified time when the status in which the exit roller or the middle transport roller is r...

Page 742: ...d time when the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller is nipped or performing paper transport The turning ON of the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller home position sensor S23 is not detected in the specified time when the saddle stitch 3rd transport roller is released Probable cause Checking and measures Saddle stitch 3rd transport roller drive motor M10 abnormality Check if the electrical continuit...

Page 743: ... of 5V 5 when OFF If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the saddle stitch staple unit Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the saddle stitch staple unit Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the saddle stitch staple uni...

Page 744: ...PC board Classification Contents Finisher related service call Transport motor abnormality The transport motor is not rotating or the stack transport roller 1 and 2 is not rotating normally Check Item Measure Stack transport roller If there is mechanical problem when the stack transport roller 1 and 2 are rotated fix the mechanism Transport motor M2 Check the connectors and harnesses between the t...

Page 745: ...N17 Replacement part Measure Paper holder home position sensor S6 Finisher controller PC board Check item Measures Paper pusher cam Rotate the paper pusher cam Fix any mechanical problem Paper holder home position sensor Check if the connector CN9 on the finisher controller PC board is disconnected from the paper holder home position sensor S6 and the harnesses are open circuited Correct if so Par...

Page 746: ...HP Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 5V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connector Hole punch control PC board HP CN3 CN5 CN6 Hole p...

Page 747: ...t motor M1 is rotated fix the mechanism Check the connectors and harnesses between the hole punch control PC board HP and skew adjustment motor M1 Skew home position sensor S2 Sensor check Harness check Replacement part Measure Skew home position sensor S2 Skew adjustment motor M1 Hole punch control PC board HP Error Timing of detection Punch waste full sensor After the sensor output adjustment th...

Page 748: ...input value is higher than 3 5V against the output value of 0 1V Probable cause Checking and measures Trailing edge detection sensors S39 and S40 abnormality Measure the voltage on TP48 on the hole punch control PC board HP Then check that the measured voltage is 2 5V or higher when not shielded and 1V or lower when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace a couple ...

Page 749: ...S26 or the rear punch shaft home position sensor S22 is not changed after punching request is sent A punching locking signal is detected consistently over the specified time The punch shaft home position sensor S26 or the rear punch shaft home position sensor S22 does not detect that the shaft is not at its home position at the start of punching or punch waste full detection Probable cause Checkin...

Page 750: ...hole punch control PC board HP Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower when not shielded and within the range of 5V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Punch shaft rotational direction sensor S35 abnormality Measure the voltage on pin CN3 9 on the hole punch control PC board HP Then check that the measured voltage is 1V or lower wh...

Page 751: ...home position sensor S4 Punch motor M3 Hole punch control PC board HP Classification Contents Finisher related service call Punch ROM checksum error Abnormality of checksum value on Hole punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned on Check Item Measure Hole punch control PC board HP Board check Replacement part Measure Hole punch control PC board HP Error Timing of detection Fla...

Page 752: ...control PC board CN17 Replacement part Measure Rear alignment motor M6 Finisher control PC board Error Timing of detection Front alignment motor M2 Front alignment plate home position sensor S5 The turning OFF of the front alignment plate home position sensor S5 is not detected when the front alignment plate is moved from a point where this sensor is turned ON to one point where this sensor is tur...

Page 753: ...nge of 3 3V 5 when shielded If the voltage does not fall within the range mentioned replace the sensor Faulty cables and connectors Check if the electrical continuity between the connector terminals is normal If electricity is not conducted replace the connectors Finisher control PC board FIN CN2 CN8 Finisher control PC board FIN abnormality If the error still occurs after replacing the motor sens...

Page 754: ...mber of pulses during the initial rising movement of the knurled roller The knurled roller home position sensor S10 does not detect that the knurled roller is not at the upper position after the 2nd transport motor M4 has been driven at the specified number of pulses during the initial lowering movement of the knurled roller The knurled roller home position sensor S10 does not detect that the knur...

Page 755: ... Setting of the equipment Check if the MJ 1101 1107 is set as the specified finisher on the equipment 08 4548 Converter PC board Check the connectors and harnesses between the converter PC board and the finisher controller PC board Board check Finisher control PC board Board check Replacement part Measure Converter PC board Finisher control PC board Check Item Measure Main power switch Turn OFF th...

Page 756: ...d CN302 is disconnected 3 Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken 4 Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open circuited Replacement part Measure OCT motor OCT board LGC board Classification Contents Offset tray related service call Initialize error of the offset tray Check Item Measure Offset gate motor MOT2 board LGC board 1 C...

Page 757: ...re damaged Check Item Measure Encryption key status Check the displayed message 3 CLEAR Power ON 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Status Measure OK AccessFailed Replace the SYS board P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board all steps OK KeyNull Recover the encryption key on the SYS board P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board P...

Page 758: ...rd all steps With USB backup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is insta...

Page 759: ...n of the HDD Connector and harness check Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent Check if HDD for other equipment is not installed Check if SRAM for other equipment is not installed 2 If the error still occurs after step 1 perform the following Perform 3C 5 Key Backup Restore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3...

Page 760: ...store and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 3 work and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 2 work and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 perform the followi...

Page 761: ...estore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 4 registration and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 3 registration and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 pe...

Page 762: ...store and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 5 backup and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 4 backup and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 perform the fol...

Page 763: ...estore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 6 imagedata and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 5 imagedata and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 perform ...

Page 764: ...store and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 7 storage and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 6 storage and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 perform the f...

Page 765: ...estore and check that each Key Status is OK If not recover the key copy SRAM Key Status to FROM Key Status or vice versa 3 If the error persists after step 2 perform 5 C POWER 2 Recovery F S 8 encryption and then restart the equipment 4 If the error persists after step 3 perform 5 C POWER 3 Initialize HDD 7 encryption and then restart the equipment 5 If the error still persists after step 4 perfor...

Page 766: ...erform the bad sector check 08 9072 If the check result is OK recover the data in the HDD If the check result is failed replace the HDD Replacement part Remark HDD SYS board Classification Error item Other service call ADI HDD error The ADI HDD has been replaced illegally to SATA HDD normal type Check Item Measure Setting Check if the HDD has been replaced with a SATA HDD normal type 1 Start the e...

Page 767: ...ebooting the equipment or no abnormality is found on any check items for the HDD reinstall the master data HD Data HDD Connector check Harness check Perform the bad sector check 08 9072 If the check result is OK recover the data in the HDD If the check result fails replace the HDD Check that either the ADI HDD or SATA HDD normal type is mounted 1 Start the equipment in the 4C mode 4 C POWER 2 Chec...

Page 768: ...M ADIKey or FROM ADIKey status is other than OK Restore the ADI HDD encryption key In case both of the SRAM ADIKey or FROM ADIKey status are other than OK Reinstall the master data HD Data HDD If the error persists even after above step replace the HDD If the equipment operation disabled after above step replace the HDD Classification Error item Other service call ADI HDD error The generation of A...

Page 769: ...ct 5 Key Backup Restore and then press the START button 4 Select 6 ADIKey FROM to SRAM and then press the START button 5 After the restoring of the encryption key has completed Operation Complete is displayed 6 After the operation has completed shut down the equipment by pressing the POWER button HDD If the error persists even after above step replace the HDD If the equipment operation disabled af...

Page 770: ...E Replace Format HDD Step 3 and later in E Replace Format HDD SRAM board 1 If the error is not cleared even after reinstallation replace the SRAM board P 9 25 9 2 8 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM 2 If the error is not cleared even after replacing the SRAM board replace the SYS board P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board Classification Contents Othe...

Page 771: ...ackup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is installed D Restore encrypti...

Page 772: ...when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is installed D Restore encryption key E Restore license Classification Contents Other service call Key consistency error The license data are damaged Check Item Measure Encryption key status confirmation Check the message displayed by 3 C START 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Licence Status FROM Licence Status Measure AccessFailed Replace ...

Page 773: ...up license Classification Contents Other service call Key consistency error Encryption key for ADI HDD is damaged Check item Measures Encryption key status confirmation Check the message displayed by 3 C POWER 5 Key Backup Restore SRAM Key Status FROM Key Status Measure AccessFailed Replace the SYS board P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board all steps With USB backup...

Page 774: ...SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key only when ADI HDD is installed D Restore encryption key E Restore license KeyMismatch KeyMismatch The error occurs when the SYS board is replac...

Page 775: ...Failed Replace the SYS board P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board all steps With USB backup data All key data recovery 1 Recover all the data on the SRAM board 5 9 POWER 2 Restore SRAM Data from USB For details see 12 1 4Cloning procedure B Restore procedure 2 Recover the encryption key license on the SYS board Follow the procedures below noted in P 9 19 9 2 4 Preca...

Page 776: ...eplaced Recover the encryption key on the SYS board Transfer the license from SYS SRAM to SYS FROM P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board C Restore ADI key The error occurs except when the SYS board is replaced Recover the encryption key on the SRAM board Transfer the license from SYS FROM to SYS SRAM P 9 25 9 2 8 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM G Ba...

Page 777: ... Rebuilding all databases is performed all data including log user role group department information and address book data are deleted If you back up the data in advance they will be recovered by restoring them after rebuilding the database Classification Error item Other service call Login after the startup fails in any starting mode because log management database is corrupted Check item Measure...

Page 778: ...n Contents Other service call This error occurs when the top 3 bytes of the MAC address is not 00 80 91 Check Item Measure SYS board Replace the SYS board Replacement part Remarks SYS board Classification Contents Other service call The filtering function is not working properly due to the damage to the file for the filtering setting Check Item Measure Setting 1 Check the bad sector of the HDD 08 ...

Page 779: ... Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 If F200 occurs while High 3 is set for the security level 08 8911 it cannot be released by installing the firmware using the USB media Install the Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 by 08 3840 Classification Error item Other service call The file system is abnormal Check item Measures Setting Diagnose the file system with 5 C Start 1 Check F S and then recover the probl...

Page 780: ...r restarting the equipment reinstall software following the procedure below 1 Turn the power OFF 2 Turn the power back ON while pressing the 4 and 9 buttons simultaneously 3 The authentication screen is displayed Enter the password Password entry is not required under the default setting 4 Key in 1 to select 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS data and 4 to select 4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE OS data and then press the STA...

Page 781: ...e call occurs again after the reboot replace the HDD Classification Error item Other service call The year 2038 problem Check item Measures Setting Reset the date and request the administrator to set the date and time 1 Turn the power on while pressing the 6 and CLEAR button 2 Select 2 key and then press the START button 3 Press the START button on the confirmation screen displayed The date is set...

Page 782: ...ery 1 Turn the power ON while pressing 6 and the CLEAR button simultaneously 2 Key in 3 to select 3 SRAM Re Initialize Support and then press the START button 3 After the operation is completed shut down the equipment by pressing the ON OFF button If it is not recovered perform the following procedure 4 Turn the power ON while pressing 3 and the CLEAR button simultaneously 5 Enter the password on ...

Page 783: ...311 and CN316 LGC board Check if the LGC board in which is corresponded to the equipment model is installed Check if the label color of the LGC board indicated in the figure with the arrow is corresponded to the equipment model indicated on the rating label e STUDIO206L e STUDIO207L White e STUDIO256 e STUDIO257 Pink e STUDIO306 e STUDIO307 Blue e STUDIO356 e STUDIO357 Yellow e STUDIO456 e STUDIO4...

Page 784: ...es Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs first check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting 5 C POWER 3 1 Classification Error item Internet FAX related error Insufficient memory Check item Measures Setting When there are running jobs perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs If ...

Page 785: ...ror System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting 5 C POWER 3 1 If the recovery is still not completed replace the SYS board Classification Error item Internet FAX related error Directory creation ...

Page 786: ...tem Internet FAX related error Address Book reading failure Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again Classification Error item Internet FAX related error Terminal IP address unset Check item Measures Setting Reset the Terminal IP address Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the...

Page 787: ...rror item Internet FAX related error Terminal mail address error Check item Measures Setting Check the SMTP Authentication method Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address Set the correct SMTP Authentication method or delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address then perform the job again Classification Error item Internet FAX related error...

Page 788: ...sures Setting Check that SMTP authentication method login name and password are correct then perform authentication again Classification Error item Internet FAX related error POP Before SMTP ERROR Check item Measures Setting Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are correct then perform authentication again Classification Error item Internet FAX related error Internet FAX tr...

Page 789: ...08A 4508A 5008A ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 251 1CC1 Power failure Classification Error item Internet FAX related error Power failure Check item Measures Setting Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable ...

Page 790: ...erminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct Check if the mail server is operating properly Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Classification Error item RFC related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the mail server is operating properly Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs replace the ...

Page 791: ...008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 253 2553 Destination mail address error RFC 553 Classification Error item RFC related error Check item Measures Setting Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server ...

Page 792: ... Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Check that there is no other job in progress and format the HDD with 5 C START If the recovery is still not completed replace the SYS board Replace parts Remarks SYS board Classification Error item Electronic Filing related error Check item Measures Setting Reset and extend the Maximum send to E mail Internet FAX size or reduce th...

Page 793: ...arks Main memory Classification Error item Electronic Filing related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the Function list can be printed If it can be printed retry the job which was in error If it cannot be printed replace the main memory If it still cannot be recovered format the HDD with 5 C START Classification Error item Electronic Filing related error Check item Measures Setting Check...

Page 794: ...ures Setting Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable Classification Error item Electronic Filing related error Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Classification Error item Electronic Filing related error Check item Measures Setting Reduce the number of inserting pag...

Page 795: ...on is disabled Check item Measures Setting Check if WS Scan Web Scanning Services function is disabled on the TopAccess screen If it is disabled enable it Classification Error item Remote scanning related error Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON then retry the job in error Classification Error item Remote scanning related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the ...

Page 796: ... job is performed by a user without Remote Scan privilege Check item Measures Setting Check if correct privilege is given to the user Classification Error item Remote scanning related error A job is performed by a user without WS Scan privilege Check item Measures Setting Check if correct privilege is given to the user Classification Error item Remote scanning related error A user without e Filing...

Page 797: ...ation Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting When there are running jobs perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Clas...

Page 798: ...error again Check that there is no other job in progress and format the HDD with 5 C START If the recovery is still not completed replace the SYS board Replace parts Remarks SYS board Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity ...

Page 799: ...tem Measures Setting Check the template settings Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and then perform the job in error again Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD PRIVATE PROOF INVALID and perform it again Check if the server or local disk has a suffi...

Page 800: ...em E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Reset the SMTP address and perform the job Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the SMTP server is operating properly Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Reset the login name and password of SMTP...

Page 801: ...erform the job again Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address then perform the job again Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again Classi...

Page 802: ...ob received 2CC1 Power failure Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Reset the setting of the mail box or Received InternetFax Forward Classification Error item E mail related error Check item Measures Setting Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable ...

Page 803: ...wer OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs check that there is no job and format the HDD with 5 C START Classification Error item File sharing related error Insufficient memory Check item Measures Setting When there are running jobs perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then ba...

Page 804: ...nt module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality File library access abnormality Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting 5 C POWER 3 1 If the recovery is still not completed replace the SYS board Classification Error item File sharing related error Direct...

Page 805: ...b in error again If an image file not encrypted is created consult your administrators Classification Error item File sharing related error Creation of meta data failed when a user tried to perform meta scan for Scan to File Check item Measures Setting Check the template settings Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and then perform the job i...

Page 806: ...related error Exceeding documents in folder Creating new document is failed Check item Measures Setting Delete some documents in the folder Classification Error item File sharing related error Storage capacity full failure during processing Check item Measures Setting Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD PRIVATE PROOF INVALID and perform it again Check if the server or local disk...

Page 807: ...ror Power failure Check item Measures Setting Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely Check if the power voltage is unstable Classification Error item File sharing related error Job status is invalid Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs check that there is no job and format the HD...

Page 808: ... files in the folder Check item Measures Setting Delete some files in the folder Perform the job in error again Classification Error item File sharing related error Creation of a directory failed Check item Measures Setting Check if access privilege to the storage directory is writable Check if the server or local disk has sufficient space in its disk capacity Classification Error item File sharin...

Page 809: ...le format failed Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Replace the main memory and then perform the job in error again Classification Error item File sharing related error Creation of a file failed due to PDF encryption error Check item Measures Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON Perform the job in error again Classification Error i...

Page 810: ...Measures Setting Delete unnecessary files in the folder Classification Error item File sharing related error HDD became full while storing data in HDD Check item Measures Setting Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD PRIVATE PROOF INVALID and perform it again Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity Check that there is enough space in the USB memor...

Page 811: ...mail reception related error E mail analysis error E mail format error E mail decode error Check item Measures Setting These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail Request the sender to retransmit the mail Classification Error item E mail reception related error Partial mail time out error Check item Measures Setting The partial mail is not re...

Page 812: ...also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper In this case supply the printing paper Classification Error item E mail reception related error Warning of partial mail interruption Check item Measures Setting This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to ...

Page 813: ... error TIFF compression error Check item Measures Setting The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment Acceptable MH MR MMR JBIG Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method Classification Error item E mail reception related error TIFF resolution error Check item Measures Setting The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for...

Page 814: ...tination is not on the Address Book Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been changed Classification Error item E mail reception related error Power failure error Check item Measures Setting Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered Classification Error it...

Page 815: ...occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality Check if the FAX board is correctly connected Classification Error item E mail reception related error POP3 server connection error Check item Measures Setting Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct or check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly Classif...

Page 816: ... reception related error POP3 Login Type ERROR Check item Measures Setting Check that the login type Auto POP3 or APOP to the POP3 server is correct Classification Error item E mail reception related error File I O error Check item Measures Setting These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD Request the sender to retransmit the mail Replace the HDD if the error sti...

Page 817: ...e job in error again after the completion of the running jobs If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again Classification Error item TopAccess related error No printer kit Invalid Check item Measures Setting Install the print kit and perform the job again Register it officially and perform the job again Classification Error item TopAccess related error HD...

Page 818: ... storing limitation error Check item Measures Setting Select Remote SMB FTP for the destination of the file to save Classification Error item TopAccess related error Hardcopy security printing error Check item Measures Setting Hardcopy security printing cannot be performed because the function is restricted in the self diagnosis mode Classification Error item TopAccess related error Restriction er...

Page 819: ...g Check department information registered in this equipment Classification Error item TopAccess related error Problem in LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings Check item Measures Setting Confirm the administrator for the LDAP server connection or LDAP server authorization settings Classification Error item Printer function error Quota over error The number of the assigned pa...

Page 820: ...heck item Measures Setting 1 Drop a coin in Perform the print job in error again 2 Insert a key card and then perform the print job in error again or consult your administrator 3 Insert a key copy counter and then perform the print job in error again 4 Reset the scheduled print job and then perform the print job in error again Classification Error item TopAccess related error Fax Internet Fax tran...

Page 821: ...n Error item TopAccess related error Printing a file whose format is not supported or an invalid file Check item Measures Setting The format of this file other than PDF and JPEG is not supported in USB direct printing or the file is invalid Check the file Classification Error item TopAccess related error Not being authorized to perform JOB Check item Measures Setting Confirm the administrator for ...

Page 822: ... on your PC monitor or check if the file format is supported by this equipment Classification Error item TopAccess related error Double sign encoding error Check item Measures Setting Printing using this function cannot be performed due to a decoding process error which occurs because the PDF file is encrypted incorrectly or encrypted in a language not supported Classification Error item TopAccess...

Page 823: ...rformed success fully due to other abnormalities Check item Measures Setting 1 Perform the job in error again If the error still occurs turn the power OFF and then back ON and perform the job again 2 Collect the debug log with USB media P 8 3 8 1 2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device 3 Initialize HDD Refer to step 3 and later in E Replace Format HDDin P 9 14 9 2 3 Precautions and procedures...

Page 824: ... do not press any button on the control panel or start any print or fax job Classification Error item Communication error with external application A temporary password downloaded from e Bridge and entered in this equipment is not valid or the permanent password set in the e Bridge is not valid Check item Measures Setting Confirm the user name and tentative password Classification Error item Commu...

Page 825: ...rror with external application SSL certificate is expired Check item Measures Setting Set the correct time Classification Error item Communication error with external application SSL certificate is invalid Check item Measures Setting Install the correct SSL certificate Classification Error item Communication error with external application DNS address is invalid Check item Measures Setting Set the...

Page 826: ...sification Error item Communication error with external application Initial URL is invalid Check item Measures Setting Set the correct initial URL Classification Error item Communication error with external application An error in the HTTP communication Check item Measures Setting Check the URL for communication Check that the valid IP address is assigned to connect to the server Classification Er...

Page 827: ...nt has been damaged or incorrect authentication data have been sent Or TOSHIBA equipment which has not been supported by the cloud server has been tried to be registered Check item Measures None Contact the administrator of the cloud server Classification Error item Server busy error The server cannot handle periodic communication from the equipment due to overloading This phenomenon occurs when a...

Page 828: ...re and the setting files of the equipment that have been downloaded from a cloud server have been damaged Check item Measures Communication environment Retry the downloading of the setting files and the system software Check if the network cable is disconnected Check the connection of network devices If there is no problem with the network environment contact the administrator of the cloud server ...

Page 829: ...e network FAX is not registered on the Address Book Register it Classification Error item TopAccess related error Displayed when data have been imported from TopAccess Not an error message Check item Measures Setting Data Address book department or user information have been imported successfully No troubleshooting is required Classification Error item TopAccess related error Data import from TopA...

Page 830: ... failed Check item Measures Setting Check if the operating status of the server and connection from the MFP have been confirmed Classification Error item MFP access error Failed to connect to the authentication server Check item Measures Setting Check that the server setting is proper by accessing TopAccess Administration Maintenance Directory Service When Auto is selected as the authentication me...

Page 831: ...heck item Measures Setting Use a valid card Classification Error item MFP access error The equipment or device cannot be used since no privilege is given Check item Measures Setting Use the enable card or contact your administrator Classification Error item MFP access error The self diagnostic code required for card authentication is not set in this equipment correctly Check item Measures Setting ...

Page 832: ...ccess as an administrator and release the locked user account Classification Error item MFP access error The e Filing Box became inaccessible because an incorrect password has been entered for the specified number of times Check item Measures Setting Retry access after a few minutes For the locking period ask your administrator Classification Error item MFP access error The automatic secure erase ...

Page 833: ...tem MFP access error Print log DB near full 90 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Print Job Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error Print log DB near full 80 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Print Job Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error Print log DB near full 70 Check item Measur...

Page 834: ... with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Scan Job Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error Scan log DB near full 70 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Scan Job Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error FAX transmission log DB full Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Fax Transmission Journal Export...

Page 835: ...m MFP access error FAX reception log DB full Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Fax Reception Journal Export Classification Error item MFP access error FAX reception log DB near full 95 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Fax Reception Journal Export Classification Error item MFP access error FAX reception log DB ...

Page 836: ...ion Error item MFP access error Message log DB near full 95 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Message Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error Message log DB near full 90 Check item Measures Setting Perform Clear Log with TopAccess Logs Export Logs Message Log Export Classification Error item MFP access error Message log DB near full 80 Chec...

Page 837: ...tallation failed 7107 Patch installation failed 7111 Plug in installation failed 7113 HDD data installation failed 7115 DF firmware installation failed 7117 Check item Measures Setting Software package file may have a problem or may be corrupted Check the software package file and then reattempt the installation Classification Error item Maintenance error Printer driver upload failed Check item Me...

Page 838: ...s The GP 1080 IPSec Enabler cannot return to the USB media due to license problem The GP 1070 Overwrite Enabler cannot return to the USB media in the high security 08 8911 3 Classification Error item Maintenance error The one time dongle license fails to be installed Check item Measures Setting Check that the USB media is correctly installed Classification Error item Maintenance error The import o...

Page 839: ... file Classification Error item Maintenance error The import of user information failed Check item Measures Setting Check if you are importing a valid file Classification Error item Maintenance error The import of role information failed Check item Measures Setting Check if you are importing a valid file Classification Error item Maintenance error The import of department data failed Check item Me...

Page 840: ... There is a possibility that the amount of the combined user information has exceeded the maximum for registration during the import or the file contains invalid data Check if you are importing a valid file and also that the amount of the combined user information does not exceed the maximum Classification Error item Maintenance error A part of the department data was not imported Check item Measu...

Page 841: ...of all data templates Address Book Mailbox failed Check item Measures Setting Check if you are importing a valid file Classification Error item Maintenance error The export of Address Book data failed Check item Measures Setting Check if there is enough capacity in the HDD and then retry the export Classification Error item Maintenance error The export of template data failed Check item Measures S...

Page 842: ...ion failed Check item Measures Setting Check if there is enough capacity in the HDD and then retry the export Classification Error item Maintenance error The export of department data failed Check item Measures Setting Check if there is enough capacity in the HDD and then retry the export Classification Error item Maintenance error The export of ICC Profile failed Check item Measures Setting Check...

Page 843: ...intenance error The export of all data templates Address Book Mailbox failed Check item Measures Setting Check if there is enough capacity in the HDD and then retry the export Classification Error item Maintenance error Failed to upload DDNS public key file Check item Measures Setting DDNS public key file may have a problem or be corrupted Check the file and perform the job again Classification Er...

Page 844: ...on Error item Maintenance error The deletion of device certificate failed Check item Measures Setting Restart the equipment and then retry Classification Error item Maintenance error The deletion of the CA certificate failed Check item Measures Setting Restart the equipment and then retry Classification Error item Maintenance error Unidentified error occurred during certificate acquisition from SC...

Page 845: ...stallation of software or HDD replacement Classification Error item Maintenance error SCEP operation is failed Check item Measures Setting Check SCEP server and the SCEP setting on the TopAccess menu as follows Administration Security Certificate Management SCEP Automatic Classification Error item Maintenance error Software package file decryption failed Check item Measures Setting Software packag...

Page 846: ...data failed Check item Measures Setting The clone file may be invalid Check the file and then retry the import Classification Error item Maintenance error The decryption of a clone file failed Check item Measures Setting The clone file may be invalid or the password may be incorrect Check the file and the password and then retry the import Classification Error item Maintenance error The encryption...

Page 847: ...ures Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine Classification Error item Network error Manual IPv6 Address Conflict Check item Measures Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine Classification Error item Network error Stateless Address Conflict Check item Measures Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine Classification Error ...

Page 848: ...stamp and IPsec Certificate template should be valid 2 CRL DP server name is mapped in MFP s host table or DNS entry 3 Certificate against CRL Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for wrong proposal chosen Check item Measures Setting Check the IKEv1 IPsec proposal parameters like encryption authentication algorithms DH group authentication methods in MFP and peer machine Classificat...

Page 849: ...d the corresponding certificates Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for SA is not present Check item Measures Setting Check the IKEv1 IPsec proposal parameters like encryption authentication algorithms DH group authentication methods in MFP and peer machine Check 1 CA and user certificate in both MFP and remote peer certificate timestamp and IPsec Certificate template Classificati...

Page 850: ...gainst CRL Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for ikev2 if secret key auth failed Check item Measures Setting Mismatch in IKEv2 Pre Shared Key Check the PSK in MFP and peer machine Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error if peer does not support IKEv2 and falling back to IKEv1 Check item Measures Setting Remote machine is not supporting IKEv2 Going back to use IKEv1 Cl...

Page 851: ...A certificate in MFP and peer machine Check the CA certificate timestamp Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error if authentication method is not matching Check item Measures Setting Mismatch in IKE authentication type Check the Authentication type in MFP and peer Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error if ike version is not matching Check item Measures Setting Mismatch in I...

Page 852: ...ng Check the user certificate in MFP Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for remote id mismatch Check item Measures Setting Check the user certificate in peer machine Classification Error item Network error Ipsec error for remote ip mismatch Check item Measures Setting Remote traffic selector mismatch Check the source address port in IPsec filter Classification Error item Network e...

Page 853: ...ailed 8062 Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed 8063 Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed 8064 IPv6 primary DDNS update error 8065 IPv6 secondary DDNS update error 8066 IPv4 primary DDNS update error 8067 IPv4 secondary DDNS update error 8068 Check item Measures Setting Check if there is any problem with DNS or DDNS settings Classification Error item Network error This message is d...

Page 854: ... is correct Check if the entered department code and box password are correct If the error still occurs after the correct parameter is entered restart the equipment and the application Classification Error item Network error SNMP communication failed Check item Measures Setting Check if there is any problem in the application Classification Error item Network error An unidentified domain authentic...

Page 855: ...nt is invalid and not available for login for domain authentication Check item Measures Setting Check the setting to see if the user account noted in the Active Directory Users and Computers window is valid Classification Error item Network error The user account is expired and not available for login for domain authentication Check item Measures Setting Check the setting to see if the user accoun...

Page 856: ...e domain controller the same SNTP is recommended if there is an SNTP server in the network Classification Error item Network error The Kerberos ticket is expired and not available for login for Active Directory domain authentication Check item Measures Setting Check if the Kerberos ticket on the Kerberos server is expired Classification Error item Network error Login is not available for Active Di...

Page 857: ...he density Printer section 2 Check test print image 04 114 Go to step 4 if there is any problem on image Scanner 3 Are the original glass mirrors and lens dirty Clean them Printed image 4 Is the image faded Perform troubleshooting for faded image 5 Is background fogging occurring Perform troubleshooting for background fogging 6 Is there a blotch on the image Perform troubleshooting for blotched im...

Page 858: ...the auto toner sensor and readjust 7 Is the toner supplied normally Check the motor and circuits High voltage transformer Main charger Developer bias 8 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer Developer unit 9 Is the contact between the drum and developer material normal Adjust the doctor sleeve gap and polarity Developer material Toner Drum 10 ...

Page 859: ...ection 3 Check test print image 04 114 When defects occur perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedure Defective area Step Check items Prescription Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image density Adjust the density Parameter adjustment value 2 Check the image processing parameters Check the adjustment value for sharpness Printer section 3 Check test print image 04 114 Whe...

Page 860: ... Is the setting temperature of the fuser roller normal Check the adjustment values of fuser roller temperature 08 2120 2010 2009 2140 2100 2101 08 5285 Only e STUDIO356 456 506 e STUDIO357 457 507 7 Is the power supplied between the fuser unit entrance guide and the registration roller on the equipment side Check if the power supply bracket of the fuser unit is installed properly Paper 8 Has the a...

Page 861: ...ved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 323 Scanner 12 Are the original glass especially the position of shading correction plate mirror and lens dirty Clean them Defective area Step Check items Prescription ...

Page 862: ... LCF damp Change paper Avoid storing paper in damp place Bedewed scanner 2 Is the scanner bedewed Clean the scanner Drum 3 Is the drum surface wet or dirty Wipe the drum with a piece of dry cloth Do not use alcohol or other organic solvents Ozone exhaust 4 Is the exhaust fan operating properly Check the connection of connector Replace the ozone exhaust fan 5 Is the ozone filter stained or damaged ...

Page 863: ...normal Check the setting and correct it 08 2120 2010 2009 2140 515 516 08 5285 Only e STUDIO356 456 506 e STUDIO357 457 507 Developer material Toner 5 Using the specified developer material and toner Use the specified developer material and toner Paper 6 Is the paper in the drawer or LCF damp Avoid storing paper in damp place 7 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode Use the proper type of pap...

Page 864: ...d Reconnect the harness securely Replace the high voltage harness Developer unit 4 Is the developer unit installed properly Check and correct the engaging condition of the developer unit gears 5 Do the developer sleeve and mixers rotate Check and fix the drive system of the developer unit 6 Is the developer material smoothly transported Remove the foreign matter from the developer material 7 Has t...

Page 865: ...rors lens and drum Keep the power cord plugged in all trough the day and night For the model with damp heater Main charger 4 Is the main charger securely installed Install it securely 5 Is the needle electrode broken Replace the needle electrode High voltage transformer Main charger 6 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer 7 Are the connectors...

Page 866: ...foreign matter if there is any 1 6 Is there a foreign matter or dew on the drum seal Remove the foreign matter or dew 7 Is the upper drum seal of the developer unit in contact with the drum Correct the position of the drum seal or replace it Drum 8 Is there a foreign matter on the drum surface Replace the drum If there is a convex foreign matter adhering to the drum surface it indicates that the b...

Page 867: ...tter in the doctor sleeve gap Pull the doctor blade in the direction of the arrow Rotate the gear Remove the foreign matter that has come out on the developer sleeve Fig 8 12 Cleaner 13 Is there any foreign matter which contacts the drum on the cleaner stay Remove the foreign matter Defective area Step Check items Prescription Gear Developer sleeve Doctor blade ...

Page 868: ...normality on the sleeve surface Check the drive system of the developer unit or clean the sleeve surface Drive system 6 Are the drum and scanner jittering Check each drive system High voltage transformer Main charger Developer bias Transfer roller unit 7 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer Transfer roller unit 8 Is there any foreign matter ...

Page 869: ...vely 3 Is the corner of the paper folded Change the direction of the paper and set it again 4 Are the side guides of the drawer or LCF properly installed Adjust the position of the side guides Feed roller 5 Is the surface of the feed roller dirty Clean the feed roller surface with alcohol or replace the roller Rollers 6 Are the roller and shaft secured Check and tighten the E rings pins clips and ...

Page 870: ...he foreign matter 6 Is the needle electrode dirty or deformed Clean or replace the needle electrode 7 Is there a foreign matter inside the main charger case Remove the foreign matter 8 Is the inside of the main charger case dirty Clean the inside of the main charger case Cleaner 9 Is there paper dust sticking to the drum cleaning blade edge Clean or replace the cleaning blade 10 Is the drum cleani...

Page 871: ...rty Clean them 3 Has the fuser roller and separation finger for fuser roller reached their PM life Replace them High voltage transformer Main charger Developer bias Transfer roller unit 4 Is the high voltage transformer output defective Adjust the output or replace the transformer Drum 5 Is there a deep scratch on the drum surface Replace the drum if the scratch has reached the aluminum base 6 Is ...

Page 872: ...l and drum 5 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35 c or less without dew Use the toner cartridge stored in the environment with specification 6 Is there any dent on the drum surface Replace the drum 7 Is there any film forming on the drum Clean or replace the drum Main charger 8 Is there any foreign matter on the charger Remove it 9 Is the needle electrode dirty or deformed Clean or...

Page 873: ...Using the recommended paper Use the recommended paper Transfer roller unit 5 Is the transfer roller contacting with the drum Are the charger pushing spring and the transfer roller pressure spring installed properly Check them and reinstall if required Registration roller 6 Is there any abnormality related to the registration roller or with the roller itself Clean the roller if it is dirty Securely...

Page 874: ...or stain on the slit glass Remove the foreign matter or stain Discharge LED 4 Are the connectors of discharge LED harness securely connected Reconnect the harness securely 5 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean the discharge LED 6 Is any of the discharge LEDs off Replace the discharge LED Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum Adjust the doctor sleeve gap 8 Is the devel...

Page 875: ... with the drum Check the installation of the developer unit Adjust the doctor sleeve gap and polarity 8 Is the developer sleeve pressurization mechanism working Check the mechanism Main charger 9 Is the main charger dirty Clean it or replace the needle electrode and main charger grid Drum 10 Is film forming occurring on the drum surface Clean or replace the drum 11 Has the drum reached its PM life...

Page 876: ...of the leading edge of paper in the Adjustment Mode Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty or the spring detached Clean the registration roller with alcohol Securely attach the springs 3 Is the registration roller working properly Adjust or replace the gears if they are not engaged properly Feed clutch 4 Is the feed clutch working properly Check the circuit or feed clutch and repla...

Page 877: ...fuser roller and pressure roller rotating normally Check the fuser roller area Replace the rollers if necessary Drum 4 Is there a big scratch on the drum Replace the drum Operation of carriage 5 Is there any problem with the slide sheet Replace the slide sheet 6 Is there any problem with the carriage foot Replace the carriage foot 7 Is the tension of the timing belt normal Adjust the tension 8 Is ...

Page 878: ...recovery auger 4 Is the toner recovered normally Clean the toner recovery auger Check the pressure of the cleaning blade Check if the toner recovery auger is rotated properly Fuser unit 5 Are there bubble like scratches on the fuser roller 94 mm pitch on the image 110mm e STUDIO356 456 506 e STUDIO357 457 507 Replace the fuser roller Check and adjust the temperature control circuit 6 Has the fuser...

Page 879: ...lectrode main charger grid and main charger case dirty Clean or replace them Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty Clean the discharge LED 4 Is any of the discharge LEDs off Replace the discharge LED Scanner 5 Are the reflector exposure lamp mirrors lens and original glass especially the position of shading correction plate dirty Clean them Exposure lamp 6 Is the exposure lamp tilted Adjust t...

Page 880: ... Is the paper too dry Change the paper Transfer roller unit 3 Is the power supplying spring of the transfer roller installed securely Is it almost detached Check the power supplying spring and reinstall it High voltage transformer Transfer roller unit 4 Is the output from the high voltage transformer normal Adjust the output Replace the transformer if necessary Separation 5 Is the output from the ...

Page 881: ... CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 343 8 4 23 Black streaks on image leading edge during scanning Fig 8 26 Defective area Step Check items Prescription Scanner 1 Amount of surrounding void network scanning Perform 05 7489 to adjust the amount of the surrounding void during network scanning Feeding direction ...

Page 882: ... perform D Initialize SRAM system storage area and following steps Replace the SRAM board Refer to P 9 25 9 2 8 Precautions and procedure when replacing the SRAM and replace the SRAM board 8 5 3 Hard disk full error H04 is displayed Perform the following referring to P 9 14 9 2 3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD SSD Back up the user data 1 A Back up data in HDD 2 B Print out FUNCT...

Page 883: ...er is closed Confirm that the front cover interlock switch SW2 is turned ON properly when the front cover is closed Automatic Duplexing Unit ADU Confirm that both the automatic duplexing unit ADU is closed Confirm that the ADU interlock switch SW3 is turned ON properly when the front cover is closed LGC board Replace the LGC board Switching regulator Replace the switching regulator Replacement par...

Page 884: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 8 346 ...

Page 885: ...ibration of memory When performing the calibration of memory press the ENERGY SAVER button and turn the power ON When the equipment is started up normally the calibration has been completed If the calibration is not performed the equipment may be not started up normally 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 2 screws and take off the SYS board cover 1 by sliding it toward the rig...

Page 886: ... shown in the right figure When connecting the flat cable 3 to the connector insert the flat cable straightly and lock it securely Confirm that the tabs are in the positions shown in the right figure Fig 9 3 Notes When installing the flat cable 3 do not push it in strongly When installing the flat cable 3 be careful not to insert it at an angle Do not apply pressure to or damage the edge of the fl...

Page 887: ...connect them until a click sound is heard Fig 9 6 Notes When installing the flat cables 4 do not push them in strongly When installing the flat cables 4 be careful not to insert them at an angle Do not apply pressure to or damage the edge of the flat cables 6 Fig 9 7 Notes When installing the harnesses be careful not to connect each different USB harness CN112 White USB harness The harness of the ...

Page 888: ...served REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS HDD 9 4 9 1 3 Hard disk HDD 7 Remove 6 screws and take off the SYS board 7 Fig 9 9 1 Remove the SYS board cover P 9 1 9 1 1 SYS Board cover 2 Remove 4 screws and disconnect 2 connectors 1 and then take off the HDD unit 2 Fig 9 10 3 Loosen 4 screws Fig 9 11 ...

Page 889: ...4 LGC board 4 Remove 2 screws and take off the ground cable 3 Remove the hard disk 4 from the bracket Fig 9 12 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Disconnect 16 connectors and remove the flat cable 2 connected to the LGC board 1 Fig 9 13 3 Release the lock by pushing the actuators 3 and remove 2 flat cables 4 Fig 9 14 ...

Page 890: ...s 4 do not push them in strongly When installing the flat cables 4 be careful not to insert them at an angle Do not apply pressure to or damage the edge of the flat cables 5 Fig 9 16 4 Remove 4 screws and take off the LGC board 1 by sliding it toward the right side Notes The LGC board to be installed differs depending on the models Due to this before replacing be sure to check the color of the ide...

Page 891: ...e power cable before starting this work 1 Remove the left cover P 4 1 4 1 2 Left cover 2 Release the harnesses from the harness clamps 1 3 Remove 2 screws and slide the switching regulator 2 slightly toward you Fig 9 18 4 Disconnect 11 connectors Slide the switching regulator 2 toward you and take it off Fig 9 19 5 Remove 10 screws and take off the switching regulator 2 Fig 9 20 ...

Page 892: ...8 9 1 6 High voltage transformer HVT Notes Be sure to unplug the power cable before starting this work 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove 5 screws Fig 9 21 3 Release 3 hooks and turn over the high voltage transformer 1 Fig 9 22 4 Disconnect 1 connector and remove the high voltage transformer 1 Fig 9 23 ...

Page 893: ... has been completed If the calibration is not performed the equipment may be not started up normally 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the HDD unit P 9 4 9 1 3 Hard disk HDD 3 Remove the FRAM 2 from the SYS board 1 Notes Be careful not to damage the FRAM when removing the FRAM from the SYS board When installing the FRAM pay attention to the orientation Install the FRAM with ...

Page 894: ...RDS HDD 9 10 9 1 9 EEPROM for LGC board 1 Remove the rear cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover 2 Remove the EEPROM 2 from the LGC board 1 Notes Be careful not to damage the EEPROM when replacing the EEPROM When installing the EEPROM pay attention to the orientation Install the EEPROM with its concave portion left Fig 9 26 ...

Page 895: ...hat requires replacement 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 6 Do not replace the SYS and the SRAM together 7 Do not replace the LGC board and the EEPROM together To replace the HDD SSD see the following procedure P 9 14 9 2 3 Precautions and procedures when replacing the HDD SSD To replace the SYS board see the following procedure P 9 19 9 2 4 Precautions and procedures when replacing the SYS board To replace ...

Page 896: ...D has a physical failure when HDD SSD failure is suspected service call F100 108 or 120 occurred Result Description Diagnosis ID VALUE 05 0 Low possibility of physical failure HDD SSD replacement is not required c5 0 05 From 1 to 999 Defective sector has been reassigned and HDD SSD is recovered HDD SSD replacement is not required c5 0 05 Any value High possibility of defective sector existence The...

Page 897: ...ate 08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive s seek performance during normal online operations 09 Power On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time hours or minutes depending on disk manufacturer the drive has been on 0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries 0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number ...

Page 898: ...on in the HDD SSD The service technician can perform them only when users permit it Some data in the HDD SSD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper Do not replace the HDD SSD and the SRAM together When the HDD SSD is replaced do not perform SRAM data formatting Clear SRAM before the normal start up When the HDD SSD is replaced do not restore the back up file before the normal start ...

Page 899: ...ling Backup Restore Utility F code information Template registration information Address book data Available Back them up in the Administrator menu of TopAccess Department management data Available Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess Log data Print Scan FAX Transmission Reception Available Export them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess Import cannot be performed Data in the shared f...

Page 900: ...D 2 When Operation Complete is displayed on the LCD creating of the partitions is completed 4 Turn the power OFF 5 Format the service tech password 1 Press the START key in the HS 73 Clear Service Tech Password 2 When Reset Complete is displayed on the LCD formatting of the service tech password is completed 6 Turn the power OFF 7 Update the system software using the USB device See 11 2Firmware Up...

Page 901: ... User certificate G Reset FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE 1 Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE before the HDD formatting P 9 15 B Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE 2 Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE after the HDD formatting P 9 15 B Print out FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE 3 Performs FS 13 13 FAX Function Mode 4 Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to...

Page 902: ...int out FUNCTION list 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS 2 Press the ADMIN enter the password and then press the OK Notes Explain the user machine administrator about the next operation and ask him her to enter his her password 3 Press the FAX and then the TERMINAL ID to set each item 4 Press the INITIAL SETUP to set each item I Adjust image quality 1 Perform FS 05 7165 to carry out Automatic gamma adjust...

Page 903: ...s replaced if it is cleared since H Reinstallation of License cannot be performed When installing the Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 and security mode is setting High Security set the security mode levlel to 1 Low level Then restart the equipment 1 Key in 3840 and then press the ENTER 2 Select the license to be returned and then press the REMOVE 3 Install the one time dongle which you used for upl...

Page 904: ...urned press the CLOSE and then turn the power OFF B Replace the Main memory DIMM and SRAM Notes Before replacing the SYS board perform the following procedure P 9 11 9 2 1 Precautions when replacing PC boards 1 Confirm that the power is turned OFF 2 Replace the SYS board 3 Install main memory DIMM to the new SYS board from the old SYS board 4 Install SRAM to the new SYS board from the old SYS boar...

Page 905: ...f the license do not restart the equipment but perform from 2 in E Restore license E Restore license Notes If the HS Menu cannot be started or restoring completes abnormally update the system firmware by means for Recovery Update and then reattempt this procedure P 11 22 11 4 When Firmware Update Failed 1 Performs FS 73 2 Press the Key Backup Restore 3 Press the License and then press the Execute ...

Page 906: ...YES 6 After 10 to 40 seconds have passed the screen for notifying the success of the performance is displayed Then press the OK If the screen for notifying a failure of the performance is displayed quit this operation by pressing the NO Then check that the one time dongle is installed properly in the equipment 7 Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list Remarks If there are...

Page 907: ...ication label etc corresponds to the label color indicated by the arrow on the LGC board as shown below If not F901 or F901_1 occurs Combination of the speed and the label color 20ppm White 25ppm Pink 30ppm Blue 35ppm Yellow 45ppm Green 50ppm Red Fig 9 30 Be sure to follow the procedure below when the LGC board is replaced 1 Perform FS 08 4581 to copy the data in SRAM to EEPROM If you cannot start...

Page 908: ...Perform FS 08 4581 to copy the data in SRAM to EEPROM If you cannot start up with the 08 Setting Mode begin from step 2 2 Turn the power OFF 3 Remove a battery from the LGC board 4 Attach a battery to the LGC board 5 Perform FS 08 4582 to copy the data in EEPROM to SRAM 6 Turn the power OFF 9 2 7 Procedures when replacing the SLG board e STUDIO206L 256 306 356 456 506 Notes Before replacing the SL...

Page 909: ...ing the SRAM Notes Do not replace the HDD and the SRAM together Be careful not to damage the board when replacing the SRAM When the SRAM is replaced do not perform HDD partition creation Format HDD before the normal start up A procedure for replacing the SRAM is shown below When disposing of the SRAM perform the items in P 9 37 9 3 4 Precautions when disposing of the SRAM ...

Page 910: ...a SRAM The license can be returned D Clear SRAM system strage area C Replace SRAM E Restore SRAM D Clear SRAM system strage area F Clear SRAM update Error flags G Backup ADI key H Backup encryption key I Backup license J Initialize SRAM K Reinstall license D Clear SRAM system strage area F Clear SRAM update Error flags G Backup ADI key H Backup encryption key I Backup license J Initialize SRAM L E...

Page 911: ...ng High Security set the security mode levlel to 1 Low level Then restart the equipment 1 Performs FS 05 3840 2 Select the license to be returned and then press the REMOVE 3 Install the one time dongle which you used for uploading the selected license in the equipment and then press the OK 4 The Remove screen is displayed then press the YES If this screen is not displayed check whether the one tim...

Page 912: ...erform the following steps 1 Performs FS 76 2 When SRAM Clear Mode appears on the LCD press the Set Serial Number 3 Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment and then press the OK 4 Serial Number Setting completed is displayed 5 Turn the power OFF 6 Install the USB device in the equipment and then press the HS 59 Backup SRAM Data to USB 7 Enter the password ...

Page 913: ...evice start up the equipment in HS 74 1 Performs FS 73 2 Press the Key Backup Restore 3 Press the ADIKey and then Execute 4 Wait until the backup of the ADI key is completed Success is displayed 5 Restart the equipment after the backup is completed If you want to perform the backup of the license do not restart the equipment but perform from 3 in H Backup encryption key H Backup encryption key 1 P...

Page 914: ...equipment after the backup is completed 6 Turn the power OFF J Initialize SRAM 1 Performs FS 08 2 Initialize the SRAM error 1 When SRAM REQUIRES INITIALIZATION is displayed on the LCD check the destination and then press the START Key If the destination is not correct key in the correct one and then press the START Key 2 After the confirmation message is displayed press the OK 3 Perform the initia...

Page 915: ...f the performance is displayed quit this operation by pressing the NO Then check that the one time dongle is installed properly in the equipment 7 Check that the installed license is displayed on the license list Remarks If there are any other licenses to be installed repeat from step 2 If there are no other licenses to be installed press the CLOSE and then turn the power OFF L Enable HDD encrypti...

Page 916: ...nstall the FAX Board GD 1370 2 Performs FS 08 9001 the destination of FAX 3 Turn the power OFF 4 Perform the CUSTOM INITIALIZE INIT MEMORY in the FS 11 FAX CLEAR MODE 5 Perform restart the MFP 6 Set the dial type according to these buttons USER FUNCTIONS ADMIN FAX INITIAL SETUP O Set date and time Set the date and time according to these buttons USER FUNCTIONS ADMIN GENERAL CLOCK DATE TIME ...

Page 917: ...DS HDD 9 33 9 2 9 Procedures when replacing EEPROM A procedure for replacing the EEPROM is shown below Fig 9 32 A Replace EEPROM 1 Confirm that the main power switch is turned OFF 2 Replace the EEPROM 3 Perform FS 08 4581 to copy the data in SRAM to EEPROM 4 Turn the power OFF Start A Replace EEPROM Settings completed ...

Page 918: ...lectronic License Keys can be confirmed in the list print mode following the procedure below 1 Perform FS 30 111 to print out VERSION LIST It is recommended to keep this list for future reinstallation such as the replacement of the SYS board 2 Keep pressing the ON OFF button until you hear a sound to shut down the equipment Firmware Code System software 9900 System firmware 9930 Engine firmware 99...

Page 919: ...marks If there are any other licenses to be returned repeat from step 2 If there are no other licenses to be returned press the CLOSE and then turn the power OFF Notes This procedure is available only with the one time dongle used for the previous registration since the model information registered in it is utilized Use the same one time dongle and the equipment when registering the license 2 Re r...

Page 920: ...e equipment 8 Performs FS 08 3840 9 Press the INSTALL 10 Install the one time dongle in the equipment the one which you used for returning the selected license before replacing the equipment Then press the OK 11 Select the license to be installed and then press the INSTALL 12 The screen for notifying that the installation will be started is displayed Then press the YES 13 After 10 to 40 seconds ha...

Page 921: ...DI HDD When disposing of ADI HDD perform the following setting HS 74 Revert factory initial status HDD 2 When disposing of SATA HDD When disposing of SATA HDD perform the following setting HS 73 Erase HDD Securely HDD securely erasing This setting is the overwriting method complying with DoD 5220 22 M 1 LOW This is the normal overwriting method This setting is used normally 00 FF Random Verify Onc...

Page 922: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS HDD 9 38 ...

Page 923: ... counter is incremented when the total number of prints or the pixel counter value exceeds the threshold set in the following self diagnostic code e g When 0 is set for FS 08 6506 and 50 is set for FS 08 6507 The toner empty counter is incremented when 50 sheets are printed after the toner cartridge has been replaced 4 When the accumulated number of toner empty times reaches the set condition an o...

Page 924: ... Order setting screen is displayed HTTP has not been supported yet 2 Touch Panel Setting Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from the ADMIN screen Setting it with the administrator is a must Basic setting ADMIN SERVICE SUPPLY ORDER SETUP ORDER INFORMATION 1 HTTP has not been sup...

Page 925: ...ding an E mail validity of the address is checked If the address is invalid it is not sent 3 Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order 1 Enter the Service Mode P 5 7 5 3 Service UI 2 Select FAX LIST PRINT MODE and then press NEXT 3 Select SUPPLY ORDER LIST and then press PRINT TONER ORDER Order information TONER PART NUMBER Part number to be ordered CONDITION The number of conditions 1 QUANT...

Page 926: ...urn the power OFF and then ON 3 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button to enter the user function screen 4 Press the ADMIN tab When the Administrator Password has been set ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is displayed 5 Press the PASSWORD button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then key in the Administrator Password and press the OK button Confirm the password to the administrator Fig 10 1 ...

Page 927: ...RATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A REMOTE SERVICE 10 5 6 Press the SERVICE button in the ADMIN screen Fig 10 2 7 The SERVICE screen is displayed Fig 10 3 8 Press the SUPPLY ORDER SETUP button ...

Page 928: ...DIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 6 9 Press the ORDER INFORMATION button Fig 10 4 10 The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed Fig 10 5 ...

Page 929: ...der cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the number E MAIL Input the E mail address of supplier To transmit by E mail the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the address 12 Press the scroll button Press the OK button to register and then the screen returns to the 7 SERVICE screen Press the CANCEL button to cancel this register and then the screen returns to the 7...

Page 930: ...8A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 8 16 The SERVICE screen is displayed Fig 10 7 17 Press the SERVICE INFORMATION button 18 The CUSTOMER SERVICE TECHNICIAN screen is displayed Fig 10 8 ...

Page 931: ...number of customer E MAIL Input the E mail address of customer ADDRESS Input the address of customer SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL Input the E mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN 20 Press the OK button to register and complete the order information setting ...

Page 932: ...4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 10 23 Press the TONER ORDERING button Fig 10 10 24 The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed Fig 10 11 25 Select the part to be ordered Press the TONER button ...

Page 933: ...ner empty times reaches the value set in here QUANTITY Quantity to be ordered AUTO ORDER ON OFF Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not 27 Press the OK button to register the setting of toner order 28 The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING 29 Press the USER FUNCTION button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and returned to the BASIC sc...

Page 934: ...ximum 192 letters CUSTOMER NAME 9756 Maximum 50 letters CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 9757 Maximum 32 letters CUSTOMER E MAIL 9758 Maximum 192 letters CUSTOMER ADDRESS 9759 Maximum 100 letters SUPPLIER NAME 9764 Maximum 50 letters SUPPLIER ADDRESS 9765 Maximum 100 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER 9760 Maximum 5 digits SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME 9761 Maximum 50 letters SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER 9762 Maximu...

Page 935: ...ER TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN E MAIL XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SUPPLIER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX...

Page 936: ... mail address OrderInformation Order information BLACK PartNumber Black toner cartridge part number Quantity Order quantity CounterInformation Counter information PrintCounter Small FullColor 0 TwinColor 0 Black 2 Print count Small size for Full color Twin color and Black PrintCounter Large FullColor 0 TwinColor 0 Black 2 Print count Large size for Full color Twin color and Black ScanCounter FullC...

Page 937: ...R CARTRIDGE Toner cartridge SUPPLY ORDER FORM DATE TIME 99 99 99 99 99 CUSTOMER NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX...

Page 938: ... 10 16 DESCRIPTION AREA Remarks DEVICE DESCRIPTION Model name MFP model name SERIAL NUMBER Serial number DEVICE FAX NUMBER Fax number DEVICE E MAIL ADDRESS E mail address PRINT COUNTER Print count SCAN COUNTER Scan count TOTAL Total BLACK Black FULL COLOR Full color TONER INFORMATION Black remaining quantity ...

Page 939: ...ch counter information periodically on the set date and time every month Service Call Transmit E mail only When this function is effective it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call error PM Counter Transmit When this function is effective it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count has reached to its setting value or the present PM driving count has ...

Page 940: ...le Confirm the details to the administrator 1 Preparation The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting Set this screen to be displayed with the following code 08 08 9604Setting of notification display 0 Invalid Default 1 Valid 2 Setting procedure 1 Press the USER FUNCTIONS button and select the ADMIN tab Then enter the password and press the OK button Confirm the passwor...

Page 941: ...0 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A REMOTE SERVICE 10 19 2 Press the SERVICE button Fig 10 17 3 Press the SERVICE NOTIFICATION button Fig 10 18 ...

Page 942: ...ERVICE NOTIFICATION When the OFF button is pressed all functions related Service Notification become ineffective Fig 10 19 5 Enter the E mail address or FAX number of the destination When pressing the E MAIL button the screen is switched to a full keyboard Then enter the E mail addresses and press the OK button Maximum 3 addresses can be set Fig 10 20 ...

Page 943: ... 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A REMOTE SERVICE 10 21 Press the FAX NUMBER button key in the FAX number and then press the OK button Fig 10 21 ...

Page 944: ...e setting and more than one day of the week also can be selected Day of the week More than one day can be selected Notify Date 1 Notify Date 2 You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the SEND NOW button Day of the week Sunday to Saturday buttons Pressing the buttons Sunday to Saturday of the desired day makes transmission on every specified day More than o...

Page 945: ...HIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A REMOTE SERVICE 10 23 Fig 10 23 Key in the date acceptable values 0 31 in Notify Date 1 or Notify Date 2 and press the OK button ...

Page 946: ...otification setting is also available from the following setting mode 08 Items 08 code Contents Service Notification setting 9793 0 OFF Invalid 1 E mail 2 FAX E mail address 1 9794 Maximum 192 letters E mail address 2 9607 Maximum 192 letters E mail address 3 9608 Maximum 192 letters FAX number 9784 Maximum 32 digits Total Counter Transmit setting 9795 0 OFF Invalid 1 ON Valid Total counter transm...

Page 947: ...55 E Mail Supplier_emailaddress cccc xxx Address SUPPLIER_ADDRESS Customer Name CUSTOMER_NAME Tel Number 1234567890 E Mail customer_emailaddress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number 0987654321 E Mail svc toshibatec co jp ChargeCounterFormat LargeSizeChargeCount 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount 1...

Page 948: ...anning Function BLACK 20 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function BLACK 21 Number of received pages in the FAX Function BLACK 22 PM count setting value PM driving count setting value EPU K 23 PM count present value PM driving count present value EPU K 24 PM count setting value PM driving count setting value Developer material K 25 PM count present value PM driving count present value Develo...

Page 949: ...47 MACHINE MODEL TOSHIBA e STUDIO655 SERIAL NUMBER 1234567890 TOTAL COUNTER 00004787 CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER_NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER_ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 1234567890 CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS customer_emailaddress dddd xxx SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER_NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS SUPPLIER_ADDRESS SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER 5544332211 SUPPLIER E MAIL supplier_emailaddress ccccc xxx SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER ...

Page 950: ...00000000 00000000 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000 PRINT 00000000 00000000 BLACK LARGE SMALL LIST 00000000 00000000 COPY SCAN 00000000 00000000 FAX 00000000 00000000 FAX SCAN 00000000 00000000 NET SCAN 00000000 00000000 FAX COUNTER LARGE SMALL TRANSMIT 00000000 00000000 RECEIVE 00000000 00000000 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER SETTING VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 SETTING ...

Page 951: ...es in the FAX Function BLACK 22 PM count setting value EPU K 23 PM count present value EPU K 24 PM driving count setting value EPU K 25 PM driving count present value EPU K 26 PM count setting value Developer material K 27 PM driving count present value Developer material K 28 PM driving count setting value Developer material K 29 PM driving count present value Developer material K 30 PM count set...

Page 952: ...iladdress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME Tel Number 0987654321 E Mail svc toshibatec co jp ChargeCounterFormat LargeSizeChargeCount 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount 1 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 0 Charge Counter Large Small Print Counter Black Copy 00000000 00000000 Print 00000000 00000000 List 000000...

Page 953: ...Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function BLACK 18 Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function BLACK 19 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function BLACK 20 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function BLACK 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 38 Periodical Maintenance Counter Pages Drive Counts K EPU Setting 00000000 00000000 Current 00000000 00000000 K EPU Set...

Page 954: ...value Developer material K 26 PM count setting value PM driving count setting value Other parts 27 PM count present value PM driving count present value Other parts 28 History error 29 Toner cartridge information 30 Toner near empty counter 31 Setting value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 32 Current value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 33 Destination setting of toner cartridge 3...

Page 955: ...1234567890 TOTAL COUNTER 00004787 CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER_NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER_ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER 1234567890 CUSTOMER E MAIL ADDRESS customer_emailaddress dddd xxx SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER_NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS SUPPLIER_ADDRESS SUPPLIER FAX NUMBER 5544332211 SUPPLIER E MAIL supplier_emailaddress ccccc xxx SERVICE TECHNICIAN NUMBER svc12 SERVICE TECHNICIAN NAME SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NA...

Page 956: ...RECEIVE 00000000 00000000 PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE COUNTER SETTING VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU PAGES 00000000 SETTING VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K EPU DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING VALUE K DEV PAGES 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K DEV PAGES 00000000 COUNTER NOTIFICATION 1 SETTING VALUE K DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 CURRENT VALUE K DEV DRIVE COUNTS 00000000 SETTING VALU...

Page 957: ...nning pages in the FAX Function BLACK 19 Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function BLACK 20 Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function BLACK 21 Number of received pages in the FAX Function BLACK 22 PM count setting value EPU K 23 PM count present value EPU K 24 PM driving count setting value EPU K 25 PM driving count present value EPU K 26 PM count setting value Developer mate...

Page 958: ...ent value Other parts 32 PM driving count setting value Other parts 33 PM driving count present value Other parts 34 History of error 35 Toner cartridge information 36 Toner near empty counter 37 Setting value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 38 Current value of toner cartridge rotation time counter 39 Destination setting of toner cartridge 40 Usage History 41 Current value for total print...

Page 959: ... SerialNumber 1234567890 Function Printer Severity Error ErrorCode XXXX Message XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Supplier Name SUPPLIER_NAME Tel Number 1122334455 E Mail supplier_emailaddress cccc xxx Address SUPPLIER_ADDRESS Customer Name CUSTOMER_NAME Tel Number 1234567890 E Mail customer_emailaddress dddd xxx Address CUSTOMER_ADDRESS Service Technician Number svc12 Name SERV...

Page 960: ...A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved REMOTE SERVICE 10 38 10 Service technician information 11 History of error 1 The latest 20 errors are displayed 12 Toner remaining quantity Black ...

Page 961: ... with a corresponding suitable version Can t fetch Ver is displayed in the Installed Version field when the version of the installed firmware cannot be acquired properly If a normal power on is not performed after the firmware is updated and the ON OFF button is pressed while simultaneously holding down the 4 and 9 buttons Can t fetch Ver may be displayed on the control panel for some firmwares A ...

Page 962: ...x xxx is version ENGINE FIRMWARE Scanner firmware System control PC board SYS board TH410SLGWW xxx xxx is version SCANNER FIRMWARE System software HDD T410HD0Wxxxx tar xxxx is version SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data NIC firmware System control PC board SYS board T410NIC0Wxxxx tar xxxx is version NIC FIRMWARE Firmware Stored Data file name Display RADF firmware DLG board MR 3031 H617DFWW 0xxx xxx is versio...

Page 963: ...cific folder This configuration is an example The number of files differs depending on the installed option Fig 11 1 Model specific folder name 2008A_5008A 2008A_5008A T410HD0Wxxxx tar T410SF0Wxxxx tar H616DFWW xxx PUN6105T xxx FIN1110T xxx T410NIC0Wxxxx tar TH410FWW xx FIN1109T xxx TH410MWW xx TH410SLGWW xxx H617DFWW xxx FIN1042T xxx USB device Signature_N_2008A sig ...

Page 964: ... Class number 8 08h Mass storage class Sub class number 6 06h SCSI transfer command set Protocol number 80 50h Bulk Only Most common USB devices comply with the specification above and can be used for updating However the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Color Systems and Multi Functional Digital Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based...

Page 965: ...ver shut down the equipment during the update Firmware data and the following option data if installed could be damaged and may not be able to be operated properly Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 IPSec Enabler GP 1080 Hardcopy Security kit GP 1190A A Updating firmware 1 Connect the USB device to the PC and write the model specific folder ...

Page 966: ...reen 5 Enter the password and then press the OK button If the password is not set for Service press the OK button without entering anything Fig 11 3 The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx 3 minutes On this screen the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to be updated are displayed Fig 11 4 Enter Password _ 1 Q W E R T Y U I O P...

Page 967: ...x is written xxx is version 5 RADF FIRMWARE H617DFWW 0xxx is written When MR 3031 is connected H616DFWW xxx is written When MR 4000 is connected xxx is version 6 NIC FIRMWARE T410NIC0Wxxxx tar is written xxx is version 7 FAX FIRMWARE FAXH625TZxx is written When GD 1370 is connected 8 FINISHER FIRMWARE FIN1042T xxx is written When MJ 1042 is connected FIN1109T xxx is written When MJ 1109 is connect...

Page 968: ...ARE Updating FAX firmware 8 FINISHER FIRMWARE Updating Finisher firmware 9 SADDLE FIRMWARE Updating Saddle firmware 10 PUNCH FIRMWARE Updating Punch firmware Status display during update Status display when update is completed SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data update in progress SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data Completed SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data update in progress SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data Completed ENGINE FIRMWARE upd...

Page 969: ...N All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 9 8 Update successfully completed Restart the MFP is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly Fig 11 5 ...

Page 970: ...played on the control panel When the check is completed properly no message for notifying the success will appear and the firmware updating will start If it fails Invalid Signature and Copy Data with valid signature in USB will be shown In that case firmware updating cannot be performed so turn the power OFF and disconnect the USB device Check that there is no abnormality in the firmware data and ...

Page 971: ... error When the download is finished M08 Reception status code abnormality When the download is requested Reception status code abnormality When the download is requested M09 Reception status code abnormality When the download is written Reception status code abnormality When the download is written M10 Reception status code abnormality When the download is finished Reception status code abnormali...

Page 972: ...e update Error Error number Error message Error content U01 Time out When the download is requested Communication timeout When the download is requested U02 Time out When the download is written Communication timeout When the download is written U03 Time out When the download is finished Communication timeout When the download is finished U04 Reception failed When the download is requested Downloa...

Page 973: ...download is written Reception status code abnormality When the download is written F10 Reception status code abnormality When the download is finished Reception status code abnormality When the download is finished F00 Other error Other error Saddle firmware update Error Error number Error message Error content A01 Time out When the download is requested Communication timeout When the download is ...

Page 974: ...e Important Only the USB devices which meet the following conditions should be used for updating Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed A combination USB device with a flash memory to be connected directly to the USB port and its capacity is 1GB or more Operation of the USB device used for updating has been confirmed at the input check of this equipment ...

Page 975: ...evice is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be performed when purchasing it The USB devices complying with USB2 0 can be used for updating Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory such as a USB connection type memory card reader CD DVD drive or hard disk since it is never guaranteed It is possible to store the model specific update program an...

Page 976: ...y Data Overwrite Enabler GP 1070 Meta Scan Enabler GS 1010 External Interface Enabler GS 1020 IPSec Enabler GP 1080 Hardcopy Security kit GP 1190A A Updating firmware 1 Connect the USB device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is stored Store the data file for updating in the model specific folder 2 Press the ON OFF button on the control panel to shut down the equ...

Page 977: ... The screen for selecting items to be updated is displayed after approx 3 minutes On this screen the current firmware version of this equipment and the firmware version of data to be updated are displayed Fig 11 9 Enter Password _ 1 Q W E R T Y U I O P 2 3 A S D F G H J K L 4 5 6 Z X C V B N M 7 8 9 Caps Space Backspace Ok Reset ...

Page 978: ...rocessing status is displayed on the LCD screen The follow screen shows the display when selecting 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data in the update selection menu Update in progress is displayed on the right side of the selected item and then Verifying Signature appears Item Condition 1 SYSTEM FIRMWARE OS Data T410SFpWxxxx tar is written xxxx is version 2 SYSTEM SOFTWARE HD Data T410HDpWxxxx tar is written...

Page 979: ...11 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 19 Fig 11 10 ...

Page 980: ...3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 20 8 Patch Update Successful Restart the MFP is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly Fig 11 11 ...

Page 981: ...uipment operate properly When an System firmware OS Data update error or System software HD Data update error occurs Update Failed or Failed appears on the screen and the error number appears next to the message For details of each error refer to the following tables 9 Press the ON OFF button to shut down the equipment and then remove the USB device B Confirmation of the updated data After the upd...

Page 982: ...means of HS 74 after the procedure A is performed A Recovering SYSTEM FIRMWARE and updating firmware 1 Turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable 2 Take off the rear cover and the SYS board cover P 4 6 4 1 15 Rear cover P 9 1 9 1 2 SYS board 5 Plug in the power cable and turn the power ON 6 Enter the service password in the authentication screen 7 Press Normal Update and select SYSTEM FIRMWARE ...

Page 983: ...n the security HDD is installed in the equipment perform the procedure B sequentially B Restoring the encryption Key and License 1 Perform HS 73 and press Key Backup Restore 2 Press the Key ADIKey or License and then Execute Recover the encryption Key or License to which KeyBroken or KeyNulll is indicated in the FROM row When the recovery succeeds the indication in the FROM row will change to OK P...

Page 984: ... update failed Update completed Recovery Update Check system firmware version FS 08 9930 Update succeeded Replace SYS board Is system firmware version correct 11 4 When Firmware Updating Fails 11 5 Confirmation of the updated data YES YES YES NO NO NO Failed twice or more YES NO Failed twice or more Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB Storage Device Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with ...

Page 985: ... NO NO NO NO USB update failed Failed twice or more Update succeeded Check system software version 08 9900 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data Is system software version correct Update completed Update USB Update succeeded Replace SYS board Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB Storage Device Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB Storage Device Update USB 11 2 Firmware Updating wit...

Page 986: ... YES NO NO NO USB update failed Failed twice or more Update succeeded Check ROM version 11 6 Confirmation of the updated data Is ROM version correct Update completed Replace target board USB update 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB Storage Device USB update 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB Storage Device Check harness connection SYS board Target board USB update 11 2 Firmware Updating with a USB ...

Page 987: ...tem firmware 08 9930 System firmware version Updating Engine firmware 08 9901 Engine firmware version Updating Scanner firmware 08 9902 Scanner firmware version Updating System software 08 8952 HD data external version 08 9900 System software version Updating PFC firmware 08 9940 PFC firmware version Updating RADF firmware 08 9903 RADF firmware version Updating Finisher firmware 08 9904 Finisher f...

Page 988: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved FIRMWARE UPDATING 11 28 ...

Page 989: ...ters Forum Class number 8 08h Mass storage class Sub Class number 6 06h SCSI transfer command set Protocol number 80 50h Bulk only The USB device should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32 Correct operation cannot be guaranteed if it is formatted in NTFS exFAT Most of the common USB device are compliant with the above specifications and are therefore applicable to this data cloning However most of th...

Page 990: ...0 Set Serial Number and then press the START button 4 Key in the serial number on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment and then press the OK button 5 Serial Number Setting completed is displayed 6 Turn the power OFF 7 Press the HS 59 Backup SRAM Data to USB 8 Enter a password max 15 characters set for the backup data 9 Backup Successfully done Restore the MFP is displayed on the L...

Page 991: ...ile 6 Restore successfully done Restart the MFP is displayed on the LCD screen when the restoring has been properly completed 7 Shut down the equipment Notes When the back up file is restored do not perform HDD partition creation Format HDD before the normal start up To perform cloning with the SRAM data backed up before the ADI HDD is initialized or replaced follow the procedure below after the r...

Page 992: ... detected The USB device has not been installed SRAM Device Not Connected The SRAM board for the SYS board has not been installed Backup not created Creation of the Backup file of data of the SRAM board for the SYS board has been failed Encryption Failed An encryption of the backup file has been failed password Not Appended to Backup Addition of the encryption password has been failed MFP Serial N...

Page 993: ...08A 4508A 5008A BACKUP FUNCTION 12 5 Invalid MFP Serial Number xxxxxxxxx An incorrect MFP Serial No has been entered MFP Serial Number Not Set Acquisition of the MFP Serial No has been failed Backup File Corrupted A backup file has been damaged Restore Display content Error content ...

Page 994: ...ting To ensure security ask the user machine administrator to back up or restore the user s data and information in the HDD A service technician can back up or restore them only when the user machine administrator permits it Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be left only on printouts When the data encryption function is enabled the following items are restricted FS 08 9112 Auto Shut...

Page 995: ...for setting the data encryption function is shown below Fig 12 4 Start A Back up data in HDD C Print out FUNCTION list D Erase HDD E Reset user s setting item and restore data information F Reset FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE G Reset FUNCTION list H Check actuation of data encryption function setting Setting completed B Print out FUNCTION FOR MAINTENANCE ...

Page 996: ...inistrator menu of TopAccess Log data Print Scan FAX Transmission Reception Message Log Available Export them in the Log menu of TopAccess Import cannot be performed Data in the shared folder Scanned data Saved data of copy FAX transmission Available Copy them to the client computer via the network The data which have been copied to the client computer cannot be copied to the shared folder Role in...

Page 997: ...ocess are encrypted E Reset user s setting items and restore data information Ask the user machine administrator to reset the user s setting items and to restore data or information Refer to the following for the reset and restore Notes When the SSL is enabled perform the setting of the following items again with Create self certificate of TopAccess Country Name State or Province Name Locality Nam...

Page 998: ...e power OFF 4 Turn the power OFF G Reset FUNCTION list Reset the fax function by referring to the function list that was printed out in P 12 9 C Print out FUNCTION list 1 Press USER FUNCTIONS on the HOME screen 2 Press the ADMIN tab enter the password and then press the ENTER 3 Press the FAX and then the TERMINAL ID to set each item 4 Press the INITIAL SETUP to set each item Notes Explain to the u...

Page 999: ...s function To disable it set 0 Invalid in the code FS 08 9379 at step P 12 9 D Enable data encryption function 12 2 5 Procedure for discarding HDD when data encryption function is enabled Set the data encryption function disabled following the procedure shown in P 12 11 12 2 4 Procedure for disabling data encryption function Then perform the code HS 73 Erase HDD Securely HDD securely erasing to co...

Page 1000: ... back up user data such as documents Address Book templates or fax settings using the export function or the backup restore utility of the TopAccess Refer to items noted in P 12 6 12 2 AES Data Encryption Function Setting Make a note of the settings on the Administration tab page of the TopAccess in advance Compatibility of cloning data is lost between the High Security Mode and the normal mode th...

Page 1001: ...ot be the same In the High Security Mode restrictions are set to the following self diagnostic codes In the above case the password is not reset The password setting can be changed with the code FS 08 8919 The HDD is initialized and the saved user data are deleted when the equipment returns to the normal mode from the High Security Mode Be sure to back up user data before having it do so After the...

Page 1002: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved BACKUP FUNCTION 12 14 ...

Page 1003: ... A4 Out MCRUN Ready to Copy Signal Open Collector SN7407 L Operating H Stop In use A5 Out EXTCTR Exit Sensor On Signal Exit Counter On Signal Open Collector SN7407 L ON In use A6 GND PG Power ground 0V In use A7 Out CSTCTR Drawer paper feed counter On signal Front side of paper print counter Open Collector SN7407 L ON A8 Out ADUCTR ADU paper feed counter On signal Back side of paper print counter ...

Page 1004: ...all signal Open Drain LCX07 L Large size H Small size 2 Out FULL C Full color Counter On Signal Unused Open Drain LCX07 L Full color 3 Out MONO C Mono color counter On signal Unused Open Drain LCX07 L Mono colors 4 Out B W Black counter On signal Unused Open Drain LCX07 L Black 5 N C 6 GND GND Signal Ground 0V 7 N C Pin No I O Signal name Function Voltage level Remarks 1 GND SG Signal Ground 0V 2 ...

Page 1005: ...both copy key cards and coin controllers 4 EXTCTR signal output signal This signal is turned ON since it is synchronized with the turning OFF of the exit sensor A coin controller counts up the degree of usage of copy cards by means of this signal This signal which is output from the LGC board is used only for coin controllers 5 CSTCTR signal ADUCTR signal output signal The CSTCTR signal is turned ...

Page 1006: ...rnally It should be charged precisely according to the usage Example To charge only when copies are made set to 1 2 Restrictions For FS 08 6011 Large size double count setting set to 0 when A3 and LD are specified as the large size and set to 1 when B4 LG FOLIO COMP and 8K are specified as the large size in addition to A3 and LD 13 3 4 Setting value change and restrictions when using the key count...

Page 1007: ...NTERS 13 5 13 3 6 Restrictions when using the external counter The Job Skip function will be disabled when an external counter is installed when a value other than 0 is set for FS 08 9016 Therefore if printing is attempted while a counter or a coin controller is used all jobs stored in the HDD may be printed ...

Page 1008: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved EXTERNAL COUNTERS 13 6 ...

Page 1009: ... power switch SW1 Damp heater switch HRNS FUS 471 J CN902 HRNS DH1 H410 CN903 AC N AC L 2 5 3 1 4 LVPS J907 1 2 1 2 HEATER D SCN H410E U 1 2 1 2 HRNS D H DRM 471 J906 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 J616 J504 J508 HRNS ACIN1 410 H413 VH 2pin 20 25 30ppm VH 3pin 35 45 50ppm Fuser unit 35 45 50ppm only Switching regulator Scanner damp heater DH2 Drum damp heater DH2 Fuse PC board Faston 250 Faston 250 B A D...

Page 1010: ...4 5 6 CN317A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 1 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 5 4 10 CN317B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN320 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 J669 CST1SZW0 CST1SZW1 SG CST1SZW2 CST1SZW3 CST1SZL0 CST1SZL1 SG SG SG CST1SZL2 CST1SZL3 HRNS LGC PSIZE H410 HRNS LGC PSIZE H410 HRNS LGC CSTSN H410 HRNS LGC CSTSN H410 HRNS PFP EMP H373 HRNS PFP EMP H373 HRNS PFU COV H373 HRNS LGC FEED H410 HRNS LGC FEED H410 CST1 LGT SW SW7 CST2 ...

Page 1011: ... transport clutch G CLT7 TR M CLT Low speed transport clutch G Symbol Name Figure Wire harness location CCD PWA F CCD CCD driving PC board CCD board A 3 G CTIF PWA F CTIF Toner cartridge interface PC board CTIF board C 7 E CTRG PWA F CTRG Toner cartridge PC board CTRG board C DSP PWA F DSP Display PC board DSP board A 1 G EPU PWB F EPU EPU board B 7 C FUS PWA F FUS Fuse PC board FUS board D 5 H KE...

Page 1012: ...A8 A9 A10 A11 A7 A12 A13 A14 A15 A4 LDR PWA SNS 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 CST1 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN317A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 1 3 4 5 1 2 3 1 2 3 5 4 10 CN317B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN320 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2ND FEED SNR S9 J669 CST1SZW0 CST1SZW1 SG CST1SZW2 CST1SZW3 CST1SZL0 CST1SZL1 SG SG SG CST1SZL2 CST1SZL3 HRNS LGC PSIZE H410 HRNS LGC PSIZE H410 HRNS LGC CSTSN H410 H...

Page 1013: ...CLT Lower drawer feed clutch G 8 D CLT6 TR U CLT High speed transport clutch G CLT7 TR M CLT Low speed transport clutch G Symbol Name Figure Wire harness location SOL1 REV SOL REV gate solenoid E 8 D Symbol Name Figure Wire harness location CCD PWA F CCD CCD driving PC board CCD board A 3 G CTIF PWA F CTIF Toner cartridge interface PC board CTIF board C 7 E CTRG PWA F CTRG Toner cartridge PC board...

Page 1014: ...e STUDIO2008A 2508A 3008A 3508A 4508A 5008A 2015 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 14 6 ...

Page 1015: ......

Page 1016: ...1 11 1 OSAKI SHINAGAWA KU TOKYO 141 8562 JAPAN ...

Reviews:

No comments